JP2019054861A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve amusement of games.SOLUTION: In a Pachinko machine 1, as a lamp presentation included in a "super ready-to-win variation presentation 1", a mode corresponding to a setting value is selected from among a "super ready-to-win 1 lamp presentation A" to a "super ready-to-win 1 lamp presentation F". In the "super ready-to-win 1 lamp presentation A" to the "super ready-to-win 1 lamp presentation F", when a prescribed trigger occurs (for example, when a ready-to-win state is formed), first specific light emission elements emit light in colors different from each other. In this way, in the "super ready-to-win variation presentation 1", the setting value is suggested to a player by the mode of the lamp presentation.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 38

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which a winning probability of a special symbol lottery is a probability according to a set value.

Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which the winning probability of special symbol lottery is a probability corresponding to a set value (see Patent Document 1).
In this gaming machine, a setting switch for selecting a setting value is provided. In the variable display game, a random number sequence corresponding to the set value set by operating the setting switch is selected, and random numbers are extracted from the selected random number sequence. Thereby, in the variable display game, a hit occurrence probability corresponding to the set value is set.

JP-A-5-285258

However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a risk that the interest of the game is reduced.
That is, in the conventional gaming machine, the player can only predict the set value based on the frequency of occurrence of hits, and it becomes difficult to predict the set value, which may reduce the interest of the game.
The subject of this invention is improving the interest of a game.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to a first aspect of the present invention provides a setting information setting means for setting one setting information among a plurality of setting information in accordance with an operation of the operating means, and the setting information setting Game determination means for executing a game determination according to the setting information set by the means, game control means for executing a game according to the result of the game determination, and a light emission means including one or a plurality of light emitting elements; Effect control means for executing a light emission effect by the light emitting means, and the effect control means selects a mode according to the setting information set by the setting information setting unit as a mode of the light emission effect. And
In the gaming machine according to the first aspect, an aspect corresponding to the setting information set by the setting information setting means is selected as the aspect of the light emission effect.
Thereby, the set setting information is suggested to the player by the mode of the light emission effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the light emission effect, and to allow the player to predict the set setting information based on the mode of the light emission effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Here, a setting value selection switch 112 described later corresponds to the operation means. As the setting information, a setting value described later corresponds. The setting information setting means corresponds to a main control circuit 200 (step S1-16) described later. As the game determination, a start determination described later is applicable. The game determination means corresponds to a main control circuit 200 (steps S11-4 to S11-7) described later. The game control means corresponds to a main control circuit 200 (steps S11-9, S11-10, etc.) described later. As the light emitting means, there are a frame lamp 20, a panel lamp 21, a button lamp and the like which will be described later. Illumination effects are included in lamp effects described later (lamp effects included in “Super Reach Variation 1”, lamp effects included in “Slash Cutting Notice 5”, lamp effects included in “Big Hit Effect 6”, and demonstration effects. Lamp production etc.). An effect control circuit 300 to be described later corresponds to the effect control means. The modes of the light emission effect will be described later ("Super Reach 1 Lamp Effect A" to "Super Reach 1 Lamp Effect F", "Slash Cutting Notice 5 Lamp Effect A" to "Sword Kill Notice 5 Lamp Effect F", "Large 6 Lamps". Production A ”to“ Big Hit 6 Lamp Production F ”,“ Demo Lamp Production A1 ”,“ Demo Lamp Production A2 ”,“ Demo Lamp Production B1 ”,“ Demo Lamp Production B2 ”, etc.).

A gaming machine according to a second invention is characterized in that, in the gaming machine according to the first invention, the lighting device includes a plurality of modes in which the light emitting modes of the light emitting elements included in the light emitting means are different.
According to the gaming machine according to the second invention, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the light emitting element included in the light emitting means, and based on the light emitting mode of the light emitting element of the light emitting element included in the light emitting means. It is possible to make the player predict the set setting information.

A gaming machine according to a third invention is the gaming machine according to the second invention, wherein in the plurality of aspects, the number of light emitting elements that emit light at a predetermined timing, the number of light emitting elements that emit light at a predetermined timing, At least one of the emission color of the light emitting element, the light emission pattern of the light emitting element during a predetermined period, and the timing at which the predetermined light emitting element emits light is different.
According to the gaming machine according to the third invention, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

A gaming machine according to a fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third inventions, wherein the game determination includes a winning determination and a winning type determination, and the gaming control means includes: When winning is determined by winning determination, a specific gaming state corresponding to the winning type determined by winning type determination is caused, and a gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state is determined by winning type determination It is characterized by a gaming state corresponding to the winning type.
Here, as the winning determination, a special figure winning determination described later is applicable. As the winning type determination, special figure stop symbol determination described later is applicable. The specific game state corresponds to a jackpot game state described later. The gaming state corresponds to a special figure high probability state or a special figure low probability state, which will be described later.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of games.

It is a perspective view which shows the whole structure of a pachinko machine. It is the figure which showed the front of a game board and showed typically the part required for description. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the control system of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the jackpot probability according to a setting value. It is a flowchart which shows CPU initialization processing. It is a flowchart which shows a setting value change process. It is a flowchart which shows a main loop process. It is a flowchart which shows the saving process at the time of a power supply interruption. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows switch management processing. It is a flowchart which shows a usual start ball | bowl detection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a starting ball detection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a starting ball detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows a special game management process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure fluctuation waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special electric role opening / closing switching process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening release control process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening closing effective process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening release end wait process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal game management process. It is a flowchart which shows a usual figure change waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during usual figure change. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a usual figure stop. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory release pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric role opening / closing switching process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory release control process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory closing effective process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory release completion | finish weight process. It is a flowchart which shows a base ratio calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows a sub timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding command reception process. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch command reception processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation command reception process. It is a flowchart which shows a stop command reception process.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In this embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to the pachinko machine 1.

(Overall configuration of pachinko machine 1)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of the pachinko machine.
A pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 includes a rectangular outer frame 2, an inner frame 3 disposed on the front side of the outer frame 2, and a door unit 4 disposed on the front side of the inner frame 3. Yes.
The inner frame 3 is formed in a rectangular shape and is disposed so as to be able to open and close with respect to the outer frame 2. A game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the inner side of the inner frame 3.
The door unit 4 is formed in a rectangular door shape and is disposed so as to be able to open and close with respect to the outer frame 2. Thereby, the door unit 4 can open and close the front side of a game board unit 10 (game board 11 described later) attached to the inner frame 3. The door unit 4 includes a transparent plate 4a disposed substantially at the center, a decorative portion 4b disposed around the transparent plate 4a, a tray unit 5 disposed below the transparent plate 4a, and a tray. A firing handle 6 disposed on the side of the unit 5.
The transparent plate 4 a is formed in a flat plate shape using a transparent material such as resin or glass, and is disposed on the front side of the game board unit 10 (game board 11) attached to the inner frame 3. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game board unit 10 (game board 11) through the transparent plate 4a.
The decorative portion 4b is formed of a transparent or translucent resin material, and has a shape that bulges forward. Each corner on the upper side of the decorative portion 4b is provided with a sound extraction portion 4c in which a sound generator (speaker) 22 (see FIG. 3) is disposed. Each sound extraction part 4c is provided with a plurality of sound extraction holes through which the sound output from the sound generator 22 passes. In addition, a frame lamp 20 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the decorative portion 4b. The frame lamp 20 includes a plurality of light emitting elements driven by dynamic lighting control. In the present embodiment, each light emitting element included in the frame lamp 20 is a full color LED.

The tray unit 5 includes a tray 5a for receiving game balls (rental balls and prize balls), and an effect button 5b and a rotary selector 5c arranged on the front side of the tray 5a.
The effect button 5b is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape, and is disposed so as to protrude upward from the tray unit 5. The effect button 5b can be pressed by the player (pressed downward). Inside the saucer unit 5, a first operation detection switch 24 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a pressing operation of the effect button 5b is disposed. The first operation detection switch 24 outputs a first operation signal to the effect control circuit 300 (see FIG. 3) every time the effect button 5b is pressed. Further, a button lamp (not shown) is disposed inside the effect button 5b (inside the housing). The button lamp is configured to include one or a plurality of light emitting elements. In the present embodiment, each light emitting element included in the button lamp is a full color LED.
The rotary selector 5c (so-called “jog dial”) is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape and is disposed so as to surround the effect button 5b. The rotary selector 5c can be rotated by a player (operation to rotate about a cylindrical axis). Inside the tray unit 5, a second operation detection switch 25 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the rotation operation of the rotary selector 5c is disposed. The second operation detection switch 25 outputs a second operation signal to the effect control circuit 300 every time the rotary selector 5c is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60 [°]).

A lending operation unit 7 is disposed on the upper surface of the tray unit 5. The lending operation unit 7 includes a ball lending button 7a, a return button 7b, and a frequency display device 7c.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is communicably connected to a CR unit 500 (see FIG. 3) capable of reading and updating information recorded on the prepaid card. When a prepaid card (not shown) is inserted into the CR unit 500, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 500 is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Further, when the ball lending button 7a is operated in a state where the prepaid card is inserted into the CR unit 500, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the tray 5a. At this time, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card is updated according to the number of paid-out game balls, and the updated remaining frequency of the valuable medium is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Further, when the return button 7 b is operated in a state where the prepaid card having the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is inserted in the CR unit 500, the prepaid card is returned from the CR unit 500.
Here, the prepaid cart corresponds to, for example, a magnetic storage medium, a storage IC built-in medium, or the like.
The firing handle 6 can be rotated by the player. Inside the firing handle 6, a firing volume (not shown) for detecting the angle at which the firing handle 6 is rotated is disposed. The firing volume outputs a detection signal corresponding to the detected angle to the payout control circuit 400 (see FIG. 3).

(Configuration of the game board unit 10)
Next, the configuration of the game board unit 10 will be described.
FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a front side of the game board and schematically showing a part particularly necessary for explanation.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board unit 10 includes a set board (not shown), a game board 11 attached to the set board, and various effect devices (main image display device 31, sub) attached to the set board. An image display device 32, a movable body for production, etc.).
The set plate is formed in a box shape whose front side is open. An opening made of a through hole is provided at a substantially central portion of the back plate of the set plate.
The game board 11 is attached to the front side of the set board. The game board 11 is formed in a flat plate shape with resin. An opening (not shown) made up of a through hole is provided in a substantially central portion of the game board 11. The player can view the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 through the opening provided in the game board 11 and the opening provided in the set board.
Around the opening in the front of the game board 11, a game area 30 is formed in which game balls launched in response to the rotation operation of the launch handle 6 flow down. The game area 30 includes a left path formed on the left side of the main image display device 31 and a right path formed on the right side of the main image display device 31 as paths through which the game balls flow down. Yes.
A board surface lamp 21 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the game area 30 of the game board 11. The panel lamp 21 includes a plurality of light emitting elements driven by dynamic lighting control. In the present embodiment, each light emitting element included in the panel lamp 21 is a full color LED.

The main image display device 31 is attached to the back side of the set plate. The main image display device 31 includes a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display. The main image display device 31 has a display screen 31a capable of displaying effect images.
On the display screen 31a, three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 (not shown) in which a first effect symbol z1 (not shown) is displayed and a second effect symbol z2 (not shown) are displayed. It is possible to configure one second effect symbol display area a4 (not shown).
The 1st production design z1 is constituted including identification information (symbol), such as a number, a character, a symbol, and a character. In each of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, it is possible to perform change display and stop display of the first effect symbol z1. The second effect design z2 is composed of color bars. In the second effect symbol display area a4, it is possible to perform change display and stop display of the second effect symbol z2.
The variation display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 means that the first effect symbol z1 is moved (scrolled) in the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 and is displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. 2 A display in which the type of effect design z2 is changed (the color represented by the color bar is sequentially changed).
The stop display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 means that one kind of the first effect symbol z1 is stopped and the second effect symbol display area a4 in the lottery result display positions of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. 1, a display in which one type of second effect design z2 is displayed (a color bar represents a predetermined color).
A special symbol is obtained by combining the first effect symbol z1 that is stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 and the second effect symbol z2 that is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. The result of the lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) is displayed.
The display screen 31a can be configured with reserved symbol display areas b1 and b2 (not shown) in which a reserved symbol h (not shown) is displayed.
In the holding symbol display area b1, a holding symbol h corresponding to the start information in the notification display (special symbol variation display and stop display) is displayed. In the hold symbol display area b2, a hold symbol h corresponding to the start information for which the notification display is held is displayed.

The sub image display device 32 is disposed at a position on the front side of the main image display device 31.
The sub image display device 32 is configured by a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT display. The sub image display device 32 has a display screen 32a capable of displaying an effect image.
The sub image display device 32 can be displaced (moved) in the vertical direction by a drive mechanism (not shown). Specifically, the sub image display device 32 can be displaced within a predetermined range including an origin position (see FIG. 2) and an effect position (not shown) below the origin position. Yes.
The sub image display device 32 arranged (displaced) at the origin position is arranged above the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and does not cover the display screen 31a. On the other hand, the sub image display device 32 arranged (displaced) at the effect position is arranged on the front side of the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31, and covers a part of the display screen 31a.

A first start port 51 is provided below the display screen 31 a in the game area 30. The first start port 51 is a ball entrance that opens upward (so-called “nose”), and game balls can always be entered. The first start port 51 is capable of entering a game ball that flows down the left path (cannot enter a game ball that flows down the right path).
A special FIG. 1 start ball detection sensor 101 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the first start port 51. The special FIG. 1 start ball detection sensor 101 sends a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to detection of a game ball that has entered the first start port 51 (a game ball has entered the first start port 51). Output. The main control circuit 200 executes the first special symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101.
On the left side of the first starting port 51 in the game area 30, an upper left other winning port 55, a left middle other winning port 56, and a lower left other winning port 57 are provided. Each of the other winning holes 55 to 57 is a ball opening that opens upward, and game balls can always be entered. Each of the other winning prize openings 55 to 57 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the left path (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the right path).
In the upper left other winning opening 55, an upper left other winning ball detection sensor 106 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. The upper left other winning ball detection sensor 106 sends a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to detection of a game ball that has entered the upper left other winning port 55 (game ball entering the upper left other winning port 55). Output. The main control circuit 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the payout operation of the prize ball in response to the input of the detection signal from the upper left other winning ball detection sensor 106.
A left middle other winning ball detecting sensor 107 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the left middle other winning opening 56. The left middle other winning ball detection sensor 107 sends a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to detection of a game ball that has entered the left middle other winning port 56 (game ball entering the left middle other winning port 56). Output for. The main control circuit 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the payout operation of the prize ball in response to the input of the detection signal from the left middle other winning ball detection sensor 107.
A lower left other winning ball detection sensor 108 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the lower left other winning opening 57. The lower left other winning ball detection sensor 108 sends a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to detection of a game ball that has entered the lower left other winning port 57 (game ball entering the lower left other winning port 57). Output. The main control circuit 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the payout operation of the prize ball in response to the input of the detection signal from the lower left other winning ball detection sensor 108.

A start gate 41 is provided on the right side of the display screen 31 a in the game area 30. The start gate 41 is formed so that it can always be passed by a game ball. The start gate 41 is capable of passing a game ball flowing down the right path (cannot pass a game ball flowing down the left path).
The start gate 41 is provided with a normal start ball detection sensor 104 (see FIG. 3). The normal start ball detection sensor 104 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the start gate 41 (passing of the start gate 41 by the game ball). The main control circuit 200 executes the normal symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the general-purpose starting ball detection sensor 104.
Below the start gate 41 in the game area 30, a big prize opening 53 is provided. The grand prize opening 53 is displaced between a closed state in which gaming balls cannot enter the grand prize opening 53 and an open state in which gaming balls can enter the grand prize opening 53. A special electric combination (special electric combination) 53a (so-called “attacker”) is provided.
The special electric accessory 53a is opened and closed by a special prize opening solenoid 65 (see FIG. 3). The special winning opening 53 is normally closed with the special electric accessory 53a closed, and it is impossible to enter a game ball. However, the first winning symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is won. Thus, when the big hit gaming state occurs, the special electric accessory 53a is opened, and the game ball can be entered. The big prize opening 53 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path (it is impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
In the big prize opening 53, a big prize ball detection sensor 103 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. The big winning ball detection sensor 103 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the gaming ball that has entered the big winning port 53 (the gaming ball has entered the big winning port 53). The main control circuit 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the payout operation of the prize ball in response to the input of the detection signal from the big winning ball detection sensor 103.

A second start port 52 is provided below the special winning port 53 in the game area 30. The second start port 52 includes a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the second start port 52 and an open state in which a game ball can enter the second start port 52. An ordinary electric combination (ordinary electric combination) 52a (so-called “electric tulip”) that can be displaced is provided.
The ordinary electric accessory 52a is opened and closed by a start port solenoid 64 (see FIG. 3). The second starting port 52 is normally closed with the ordinary electric accessory 52a closed, so that it is impossible to enter a game ball. 52a is opened, and a game ball can be entered. The second starting port 52 can enter a game ball flowing down the right path (cannot enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
A special FIG. 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the second starting port 52. The special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 sends a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the second start port 52 (the game ball has entered the second start port 52). Output. The main control circuit 200 executes the second special symbol lottery in response to the detection signal input from the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102.
A right other winning port 54 is provided below the second starting port 52 in the game area 30. The other right winning port 54 is a ball opening that opens upward, and a game ball can be always entered. The right other winning port 54 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path (cannot enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
A right other winning ball detection sensor 105 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the right other winning opening 54. The right other winning ball detection sensor 105 sends a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the right other winning port 54 (the game ball entering the right other winning port 54). Output. The main control circuit 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the payout operation of the prize ball in response to the input of the detection signal from the right other winning ball detection sensor 105.

In the lowermost position in the game area 30, an out port 58 is provided for discharging game balls that have not entered (winned) any of the winning ports 51-57.
Here, a discharge path (not shown) through which the game balls discharged from the game area 30 pass is provided on the back side of the game board 11. The game board 11 is configured such that all game balls launched into the game area 30 (all game balls discharged from the game area 30) pass through the discharge path. That is, the game balls launched into the game area 30 are discharged from the game area 30 by entering any of the winning ports 51 to 57 or passing through the out port 58.
Specifically, the game balls that have entered the winning holes 51 to 57 are detected by the detection sensors 101 to 103 and 105 to 108 disposed in the winning holes, and then guided to the discharge path. In addition, the game ball discharged from the out port 58 is guided to the discharge path.
An out ball detection sensor 109 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the discharge path. The out-ball detection sensor 109 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the discharge path (game ball discharged from the game area 30). Thereby, all the game balls discharged from the game area 30 are detected by the out ball detection sensor 109.
Here, in the present embodiment, the out ball detection sensor 109 may be configured to detect only the game ball discharged from the out port 58.
Further, a plurality of nails (not shown) are arranged in the game area 30 so as to guide the game balls to the winning ports 51 to 57 and the start gate 41.

A state display device 63 is provided below the second start port 52 in the game board 11. The status display device 63 is configured by an LED or the like. The status display device 63 includes a special figure 1 hold number display, a special figure 2 hold number display, a universal figure hold number display, a round number display, a right-handed display, and the like.
The special figure 1 number-of-holds indicator displays the number of times the display of the lottery results of the first special symbol lottery is suspended (special figure 1 number of holds). The special figure 2 number-of-holds indicator displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is suspended (special figure 2 number of reservations). The number of times that the display of the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is put on hold is displayed on the usual figure hold number display (the number of hold of the normal figure). In the round number display, the type of the big hit gaming state (the number of round games executed) is displayed. On the right-handed display, an instruction for launching a game ball to the right path is displayed.
Also, below the status display device 63 in the game board 11, a general-purpose display device 60, a special figure 1 display device 61, and a special figure 2 display device 62 are provided. Each display device 60, 61, 62 is configured by a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix LED, or the like.
The general symbol display device 60 can perform variable display and stop display of normal symbols composed of numbers, symbols, and the like. Then, the general symbol display device 60 displays the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the stopped normal symbol. Here, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed on the universal chart display device 60 becomes a specific symbol, a gaming state per universal figure which is a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated.

The special figure 1 display device 61 can perform change display and stop display of the first special symbol made up of numerals, symbols, and the like. And in the special figure 1 display apparatus 61, the result of the 1st special symbol lottery is displayed by the 1st special symbol stopped and displayed. The special figure 2 display device 62 can perform change display and stop display of the second special symbol made up of numbers, symbols and the like. Then, in the special figure 2 display device 62, the result of the second special symbol lottery is displayed by the stopped second special symbol.
Here, the display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) on the special symbol display devices 61 and 62 and the display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4 start to be changed. , The time when the stop display is started, and the lottery results indicated by the symbols that are stopped and displayed.
Then, when the first special symbol (stopped symbol) stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 61 becomes a specific symbol, or the second special symbol (stopped symbol) stopped and displayed on the special symbol 2 display device 62 ) Becomes a specific symbol, a big hit gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is generated.
Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with various abnormality detection sensors 110 (see FIG. 3) for detecting various abnormal states. The various abnormality detection sensors 110 include a radio wave detection sensor that detects radio waves, a magnetic detection sensor that detects magnetism, a vibration detection sensor that detects vibration, an inner frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the inner frame 3, and an opening of the door unit 4. A glass frame opening sensor for detecting the above is included. Various abnormality detection sensors 110 output detection signals corresponding to the abnormal states to the main control circuit 200 in response to detection of various abnormal states.

(Control system configuration)
Next, the configuration of the control system in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control circuit 200, an effect control circuit 300, a payout control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 600 that supplies power (electric power) to the control circuits 200, 300, 400, and the like. And.
Each of the control circuits 200, 300, and 400 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit), a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores a program related to the progress of the game and data necessary for the progress of the game, and a CPU that is stored in the ROM. And a RAM (Random Access Memory) serving as a temporary storage area used for proceeding with processing based on a program. The main control circuit 200, the effect control circuit 300, and the payout control circuit 400 are each mounted on separate boards.

The main control circuit 200 includes a CPU 210, a ROM 220, a RAM 230, an input port 240, an output port 250, a frequency generation circuit 260, and a hard random number generation circuit 270.
The input port 240 includes a plurality of input ports (in this embodiment, input port 0, input port 1, input port 2, and input port 3).
The input port 0 receives detection signals from various abnormality detection sensors 110, a RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch, a detection signal from the key rotation detection switch 111, a detection signal from the set value selection switch, and the like.
The input port 1 includes a detection signal from the big winning ball detection sensor 103, a detection signal from the right other winning ball detection sensor 105, a detection signal from the upper left other winning ball detection sensor 106, and a left middle other winning ball detection sensor 107. , A detection signal from the lower left other winning ball detection sensor 108, a detection signal from the out ball detection sensor 109, and the like.
The input port 2 includes a detection signal from the special ball start ball detection sensor 101, a detection signal from the special ball start ball detection sensor 102, a detection signal from the general ball start ball detection sensor 104, and a power cut-off detection circuit. A power shutdown notice signal or the like is input.
A control command from the payout control circuit 400 is input to the input port 3.
Each input port (input port 0 to input port 2) is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor). In each reception storage area, 1-bit data indicating a reception state of a signal corresponding to the reception storage area is set. Specifically, each reception storage area is set to “1” when a signal corresponding to the reception storage area is input, and when a signal corresponding to the reception storage area is not input, “0” is set.

The output port 250 includes a plurality of output ports (in this embodiment, output port 0, output port 1, and output port 2).
The output port 0 outputs control signals to the display devices 60 to 63, 66 and the solenoids 64, 65.
The output port 1 transmits a control command to the effect control circuit 300.
The output port 2 transmits a control command to the payout control circuit 400. The output port 2 outputs external information (information relating to payout of prize balls, information relating to occurrence of an error (abnormal state), etc.) to the hall computer 450 via the payout control circuit 400 and the external terminal board 420. .

The output port 1 includes a transmission data register (not shown), a FIFO (First In First Out) buffer (not shown), and a transmission shift register (not shown).
The transmission data register outputs a control command input based on a subcommand transmission process (step S2-4), which will be described later, to the FIFO buffer.
The FIFO buffer is composed of a plurality of registers, and can store a plurality of control commands. The FIFO buffer stores the control command input from the transmission data register and outputs the stored control command to the transmission shift register in the input order.
The transmission shift register performs parallel-serial conversion on the control command input from the FIFO buffer, and transmits it to the effect control circuit 300 as serial data.

The ROM 220 stores a program related to the progress of the game and data necessary for the progress of the game. In particular, the ROM 220 stores, as data necessary for the progress of the game, a lottery table for executing various lotteries, various control commands necessary for controlling the effect control circuit 300, and the like.
Specifically, in the ROM 220, a use area m1 and a non-use area m2 are defined as memory areas (not shown) used by the CPU 210.
The use area m1 stores a program and data for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the use area m1 includes a program area, an unused area, and a data area. In the program area, a program for controlling the progress of the game is stored. Data for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the data area.
The non-use area m2 stores a program and data for controlling the display of the performance display device 67 (including control for calculating a base ratio described later). That is, the unused area m2 includes a program area, an unused area, and a data area. In the program area, a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 67 is stored. Data for controlling the display of the performance display device 67 is stored in the data area.

The RAM 230 temporarily stores input / output data in the main control circuit 200, data for arithmetic processing, various counters (random number counter, timer counter, etc.), flags for managing lottery results and gaming states, and the like.
In particular, the RAM 230 stores start information that is acquired in response to input of detection signals from each of the special figure 1 start ball detection sensor 101, the special figure 2 start ball detection sensor 102, and the universal start ball detection sensor 104. An area is provided. Here, the starting information refers to information such as various random values acquired with the input of each detection signal.
Specifically, in the RAM 230, a use area M1, a non-use area M2, and an unused area M3 are defined as memory areas (not shown) used by the CPU 210.
Various data are temporarily stored in the use area M1 during execution of processing based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. Specifically, the used area M1 includes a work area, an unused area, and a stack area. The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of processing based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. The stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during execution of processing based on a program for controlling the progress of the game.
In the unused area M2, various data are temporarily stored during the execution of the process based on the program for controlling the display of the performance display device 67. Specifically, the unused area M2 includes a work area, an unused area, and a stack area. The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of processing based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 67. The stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during execution of processing based on a program for controlling display on the performance display device 67.
In the RAM 230, an unused area M3 of a predetermined byte (4 bytes or more) is defined between the use area M1 and the non-use area M2. Thereby, the boundary between the use area M1 and the non-use area M2 is clarified.

The frequency generation circuit 260 generates a clock (synchronization signal) at a predetermined clock frequency (in this embodiment, 12 [MHz]), and outputs this clock to each of the CPU 210 and the hard random number generation circuit 270.
A hard random number generation circuit 270 generates a first loop counter that generates a random number for a normal symbol lottery, a second loop counter that generates a big random number for a first special symbol lottery, and a big hit random number for a second special symbol lottery. The third loop counter includes a fourth loop counter that generates a reach group random number.
Each time one clock is input from the frequency generation circuit 260, the first loop counter updates the value of the loop counter one by one within a predetermined range (in the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment). A random number is generated per normal symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, the value of the first loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
Each time one clock is input from the frequency generation circuit 260, the second loop counter updates the value of the loop counter one by one within a predetermined range (in the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment). A big hit random number of the first special symbol lottery is generated. In the present embodiment, the value of the second loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
Each time one clock is input from the frequency generation circuit 260, the third loop counter updates the value of the loop counter one by one within a predetermined range (in the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment). A big hit random number of the second special symbol lottery is generated. In the present embodiment, the value of the third loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
Each time 32 clocks are input from the frequency generation circuit 260 (once every time the clock frequency is divided by 32), the fourth loop counter sets the value of the loop counter within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, 0 to 10006). Reach group random numbers are generated by updating one by one in the range. In the present embodiment, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated every 2.666 [μs] (32 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 2.666 [μs]).

The main control circuit 200 (board) is provided with a set value operation unit (not shown). The set value operation unit includes a key rotation detection switch 111, a set value selection switch 112, and a set value display device 66.
The key rotation detection switch 111 has an operation unit that can be switched between a setting permission state and a setting prohibition state. The key rotation detection switch 111 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 when the operation unit is switched to the setting permission state. On the other hand, the key rotation detection switch 111 stops outputting the detection signal to the main control circuit 200 when the operation unit is switched to the setting prohibited state.
In the present embodiment, a keyhole into which a dedicated key is inserted is provided in the operation unit of the key rotation detection switch 111. In the key rotation detection switch 111, the state of the operation unit (setting permitted state or setting prohibited state) can be switched by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole. That is, in the key rotation detection switch 111, the state of the operation unit (setting permission state or setting prohibition state) cannot be switched unless a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole.
Further, in the key rotation detection switch 111, it is possible to insert a dedicated key into the keyhole when the operation unit is in a setting prohibited state, and it is possible to remove the dedicated key from the keyhole. On the other hand, with the key rotation detection switch 111, it is impossible to insert a dedicated key into the keyhole when the operation unit is in a setting-permitted state, and it is impossible to remove the dedicated key from the keyhole. Become.
The set value selection switch 112 has an operation unit that can be pressed. The set value selection switch 112 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 every time the operation unit is pressed.
The set value display device 66 is configured by a 7-segment LED or the like. The setting value display device 66 displays setting values to be described later. The set value display device 66 is arranged on the back side of the game board 11 so that it cannot be viewed by the player.

Here, the setting information (setting value) set in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The “setting information” is information for designating the winning probability (probability of winning the big hit gaming state) of the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery).
The RAM of the main control circuit 200 is provided with a setting information storage area. In the setting information storage area, any one of “1” to “6” is set (stored) as setting information. In the pachinko machine 1, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is set to a probability according to the value set in the setting information storage area.
In the following description, the value stored in the setting information storage area is referred to as “setting value”.
In the present embodiment, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery corresponding to each setting value is the winning probability corresponding to the setting value = “6” and the winning probability corresponding to the setting value = “5” in descending order of the winning probability. , Winning probability corresponding to setting value = “4”, winning probability corresponding to setting value = “3”, winning probability corresponding to setting value = “2”, winning probability corresponding to setting value = “1” (winning Probability “high” → winning probability “low”).

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the set value can be changed (selected) when the power is turned on. Here, the change of the set value is executed by an administrator of the pachinko machine 1 (such as an employee of a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed).
In the pachinko machine 1, the set value change permission state is started in response to the power being turned on while the operation unit of the key rotation detection switch 111 is displaced to the setting permission state.
During the setting value change permission state, the setting value display device 66 displays a value indicating a value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area.
In the setting value change permission state, each time the setting value selection switch 112 is pressed, the value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area is changed. At this time, if the value (set value) set in the setting information storage area is changed, the value (value indicating the set value) displayed on the set value display device 66 is also changed accordingly. Be changed.
As a result, the administrator of the pachinko machine 1 sets a desired value among “1” to “6” as a setting value by pressing the setting value selection switch 112 while the setting value change permission state is set. (Select).
Then, in the pachinko machine 1, the setting value change permission state is terminated in response to the operation unit of the key rotation detection switch 111 being switched from the setting permission state to the setting prohibition state. This makes it impossible to change the value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area. Further, in accordance with the end of the set value change permission state, the display of the value indicating the set value on the set value display device 66 is ended.

The main control circuit 200 (the substrate on which the main control circuit 200 is provided) is provided with a performance display device 67. The performance display device 67 is arranged on the back side of the game board 11 so that it cannot be viewed by the player.
The performance display device 67 has four (four digits) display units (not shown). Each display unit includes a 7-segment LED that can display numbers, symbols, and the like, and a dot-segment LED that can display dots such as a decimal point.
The main control circuit 200 calculates a base ratio, which will be described later, during the occurrence of a predetermined gaming state (in this embodiment, during the occurrence of the special figure low probability state and during the stop of the short-time control). Then, the calculated base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 67.
“Base ratio” is the ratio (percentage) of the number of payouts to the number of outballs. The main control circuit 200 calculates a base ratio for each predetermined section (period).
In the present embodiment, a section in which a predetermined number (60000 [sphere] in the present embodiment) of out balls is detected (discharged) is defined as the predetermined section. That is, each section starts in response to the end of the previous section, and ends in response to the number of out balls detected in the current section reaching a predetermined number (60000 [sphere]). The main control circuit 200 calculates the base ratio at any time (in real time) during each section.
Here, a predetermined time may be defined as the predetermined section. That is, the main control circuit 200 may be configured to calculate the base ratio for each predetermined time.
“Number of out balls” refers to the number of out balls. “Out ball” refers to a game ball discharged from the game area 30. In the present embodiment, the out ball refers to a game ball that passes through the discharge path (a game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 109).
Here, the game ball discharged from the out port 58 may be an out ball. Specifically, the out ball detection sensor 109 may be configured to detect only the game ball discharged from the out port 58, and the game ball detected by the out ball detection sensor 109 may be the out ball.
The “number of payouts” refers to the total number of winning balls paid out according to the number of game balls that have entered the first starting port 51, the second starting port 52, and the other winning ports 54 to 57.
The performance display device 67 alternately displays the first base ratio and the second base ratio every predetermined time (5.0 [s] in the present embodiment).
The “first base ratio” is the base ratio of the current section (the base ratio calculated for the period from the start of the current section to the current time).
The “second base ratio” is the base ratio of the previous section (the final base ratio calculated for the previous section).
Specifically, in the performance display device 67, information for identifying the type of the base ratio (first base ratio or second base ratio) by the upper two-digit display section of the four-digit display section. Is displayed. In the performance display device 67, the base ratio (percentage) is displayed by the lower two digits of the four digits display.

The effect control circuit 300 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input port, and an output port.
Based on the control command received from the main control circuit 200, the effect control circuit 300 displays effect images on the image display devices 31 and 32, lights the lamps 20 and 21, outputs sound by the sound generator 22, and various types. It controls the drive of a motor (not shown) that drives the movable body.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a program related to the progress of the effect, data necessary for the progress of the effect, and the like.
The RAM of the effect control circuit 300 temporarily stores control commands received from the main control circuit 200, data for performing arithmetic processing, and the like.
The CPU of the effect control circuit 300 determines the content of the effect to be executed based on the control command received from the main control circuit 200. Then, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, motor control data, and the like are generated in accordance with an effect program (effect control table) corresponding to the content of the determined effect. And the control signal based on each produced | generated control data is output with respect to each image display apparatuses 31 and 32, the sound generator 22, each lamp | ramp 20, 21, each motor, etc. FIG.

The payout control circuit 400 controls the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 based on the detection signal input from the launch volume.
Specifically, the payout control circuit 400 controls the launch operation of the game ball by the game ball launching device 430 so that the game ball is launched into the game area 30 with a strength according to the detection signal input from the launch volume. To do.
Also, the payout control circuit 400 controls the game ball payout operation by the game ball payout device 440 based on the control command received from the main control circuit 200 and the ball lending instruction signal received from the CR unit 500.
Specifically, the ball lending button 7 a transmits a ball lending operation signal to the CR unit 500 via the connection board 410 in response to the pressing operation. When the CR unit 500 receives the ball lending operation signal, the CR unit 500 subtracts the frequency necessary for paying out a predetermined number of balls from the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the inserted prepaid card, The record of the remaining frequency of the valuable medium in the prepaid card is updated, and a ball lending instruction signal instructing payout of a predetermined number of game balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400 via the connection board 410. Further, when the payout control circuit 400 receives the ball lending instruction signal, the payout control circuit 400 controls the game ball payout operation by the game ball payout device 440 so as to pay out a predetermined number of game balls.
When the prepaid cart is inserted and when the record of the remaining frequency of the valuable medium in the prepaid card is updated, the CR unit 500 transmits a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium via the connection board 410. It transmits with respect to the display apparatus 7c. When the frequency signal is received, the frequency display device 7c displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium indicated by the frequency signal.
The return button 7 b transmits a return operation signal to the CR unit 500 via the connection board 410 in response to the pressing operation. When receiving the return operation signal, the CR unit 500 returns (discharges) the prepaid card in which the remaining frequency of the valuable medium remains.

(About various lotteries)
Next, various lotteries executed by the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating the jackpot probability according to the set value.
In the pachinko machine 1, the normal symbol lottery is executed with the passage of the start gate 41 by a game ball as an opportunity. When a normal symbol lottery is won, a gaming state is generated per regular drawing. In the normal game state, the ordinary electric accessory 52a is displaced (opened) from the closed state to the open state, so that the game ball can enter the second start port 52.
In the present embodiment, one type of “per ordinary figure” is set as the type of game state per ordinary figure that occurs when the normal symbol lottery is won.

In the case of winning the “per symbol” (winning the normal symbol lottery), the normal symbol display device 60 controls the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed as “per symbol”.
On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is lost, the general symbol display device 60 controls the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed as “offset symbol”.
The pachinko machine 1 can execute time-shortening control as auxiliary control that is advantageous to the player.
During execution of the time reduction control, the time for displaying the variation of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “variation time”) is shortened as compared to when the time reduction control is stopped. In the present embodiment, during the execution of the time reduction control, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is improved and the time for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol is shortened as compared to when the time reduction control is stopped. In addition, during the execution of the time reduction control, the number of times of opening of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is increased in the game state per drawing as compared to when the time reduction control is stopped, and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is increased. Extended.
In the case of winning the “per normal”, the number of times of opening of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is set to 1 [times] or 3 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a at each time is 0.5. [S] or 2.0 [s] is set. At this time, during the execution of the short-time control, the number of times of opening of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is set to 3 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a at each time is set to 2.0 [s]. Is set. On the other hand, while the short-time control is stopped, the number of times of opening the ordinary electric accessory 52a is set to 1 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a at each time is set to 0.5 [s]. Is done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the first special symbol lottery is executed in response to the game ball entering the first start port 51, and the second ball is input in response to the game ball entering the second start port 52. A special symbol lottery is executed. When the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is won, a big hit gaming state is generated. In the big hit game state, a round game in which the special electric accessory 53a is displaced from the closed state to the open state is executed, and the game ball can enter the big winning opening 53.
In the present embodiment, “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” are set as the types of jackpot gaming state that are generated when the first special symbol lottery is won, and are generated when the second special symbol lottery is won. As the types of big hit game states, “big hit 6” to “big hit 10” are set.

When the “big hit 1” is won, the special figure 1 display device 61 is controlled to stop and display the special symbol at the “big hit 1 symbol”. At this time, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the effect symbols z1 and z2 are controlled to be stopped and displayed as “chance symbols”.
Here, the “chance symbol” is, for example, the first effect symbol z1 (normal effect symbol) that is stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is “6, 6, 6”. ”And the like, and the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 has a predetermined color.
When the “big hit 2” is won, the special figure 1 display device 61 controls the special symbol to stop display with the “big hit 2 symbols”. At this time, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the effect symbols z1 and z2 are controlled to be stopped and displayed as “chance symbols”.
When the “big hit 3” is won, the special figure 1 display device 61 controls the special symbols to be stopped and displayed with the “big hit 3 symbols”. At this time, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the effect symbols z1 and z2 are controlled to be stopped and displayed as “bonus symbols”.
Here, the “bonus symbol” is a predetermined symbol such as “1, 1, 1” in which the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, for example. In addition to the combination, the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 has a predetermined color.
When the “big hit 4” is won, the special figure 1 display device 61 controls the special symbol to stop display with the “big hit 4 symbols”. At this time, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the effect symbols z1 and z2 are controlled to be stopped and displayed as “bonus symbols”.
When “Big hit 5” is won, the special figure 1 display device 61 performs control so that the special symbol is stopped and displayed as “Big hit 5 symbols”. At this time, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the effect symbols z1 and z2 are controlled to be stopped and displayed as “bonus symbols”.
When the “big hit 6” is won, the special figure 2 display device 62 performs control so that the special symbol is stopped and displayed with the “big hit 6 symbols”. At this time, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the effect symbols z1 and z2 are controlled to be stopped and displayed as “latent symbols”.
Here, the “latent symbol” is, for example, the first effect symbol z1 that is stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is “1, 2, 3,” or the like. In addition to the combination, the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 has a predetermined color.
In the case of winning the “big hit 7”, the special figure 2 display device 62 controls the special symbols to be stopped and displayed at the “big hit 7 symbols”. At this time, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the effect symbols z1 and z2 are controlled to be stopped and displayed as “latent symbols”.
When the “big hit 8” is won, the special figure 2 display device 62 is controlled to stop and display the special symbol at the “big hit 8 symbols”. At this time, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the effect symbols z1 and z2 are controlled to be stopped and displayed as “probability change symbols”.
Here, the “probable change symbol” is the same as the first effect symbol z1 that is stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, for example, “7, 7, 7”, etc. The second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 is displayed in a predetermined color while being arranged with “numeric symbols” indicating odd numbers.
When “big hit 9” is won, the special figure 2 display device 62 controls the special symbols to be stopped and displayed at “big hit 9 symbols”. At this time, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the effect symbols z1 and z2 are controlled to be stopped and displayed as “probability change symbols”.
When the “big hit 10” is won, the special figure 2 display device 62 controls the special symbols to be stopped and displayed at the “big hit 10 symbols”. At this time, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the effect symbols z1 and z2 are controlled to be stopped and displayed as “probability change symbols”.

On the other hand, when the special symbol lottery is lost (in the case of “missing”), the display devices 61 and 62 are controlled to stop displaying the special symbol as “missing symbol”. At this time, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the effect symbols z1 and z2 are controlled so as to be stopped and displayed as “offset symbols”.
Here, for example, the “offset symbol” indicates that the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is stopped and displayed in at least one area such as “1, 6, 9”, etc. The number indicated by the “numerical symbol” is a combination different from the number indicated by the “numeric symbol” stopped and displayed in the other area, and the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. Is a mode showing a predetermined color.

In the case of winning from “big hit 1” to “big hit 10”, a predetermined number of round games are executed in the big hit gaming state.
In the present embodiment, when “big hit 1”, “big hit 2”, “big hit 5”, “big hit 6” or “big hit 7” is won, the number of round games is set to 4 [times]. On the other hand, when “big hit 3” is won, the number of round games is set to 12 [times]. On the other hand, when “big hit 4” is won, the number of round games is set to 8 [times]. On the other hand, when “big hit 8” is won, the number of round games is set to 15 [times]. On the other hand, when “big hit 9” is won, the number of round games is set to 10 [times]. On the other hand, when “big hit 10” is won, the number of round games is set to 5 [times].
When winning from “big hit 1” to “big hit 10”, the longest opening time of the special electric accessory 53a in each round game is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment). The In each round game, the longest open time set after the special electric accessory 53a is opened, and the number of game balls entering the big prize opening 53 in the round game is The process is terminated when one of the predetermined upper limit numbers (10 [sphere] in the present embodiment) has been reached.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1, as the gaming state related to the winning probability of the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery), the “special symbol low probability state”, the “special symbol high probability state”, Is stipulated.
During the occurrence of the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is set to the first probability (hereinafter referred to as “low probability”).
During the occurrence of the “special drawing high probability state”, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is set to a second probability higher than the first probability (hereinafter referred to as “high probability”).
The main control circuit 200 sets the winning probability of each lottery so that the winning probability of the first special symbol lottery is synchronized with the winning probability of the second special symbol lottery. Here, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery means the probability of winning the “win” (“big hit 1” to “big hit 10”) where the big hit gaming state occurs.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is a set of a value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area and a gaming state (a special figure low probability state or a special figure high probability state). Probability according to the match.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, during the occurrence of the setting value = “1” and the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1/319. 69. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “1” and the “special figure high probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 32.13.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “2” and the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 312.08. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “2” and the “special figure high probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery becomes 1 / 31.36.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “3” and the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery becomes 1 / 304.82. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “3” and the “special figure high probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery becomes 1 / 30.62.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “4” and the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 297.89. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the setting value = “4” and the “special figure high probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 29.93.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “5” and the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 291.27. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “5” and the “special figure high probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 29.26.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “6” and the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 284.94. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “6” and the “special figure high probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 28.62.

If you win a “big hit 2” to “big hit 5” or “big hit 7”, the “special figure low probability state” will be in the period from the end of the big hit gaming state to the next occurrence of the big hit gaming state. Is born.
On the other hand, when winning “big hit 1”, “big hit 6” or “big hit 8” to “big hit 10”, the “special figure high probability state” is generated in accordance with the end of the big hit gaming state. In the present embodiment, the “special figure high probability state” is started in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and is ended in response to the start of the next jackpot gaming state (end of the “big hit symbol” stop display).
The “special figure high probability state” is started in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the occurrence of the “special figure high probability state” is a predetermined number (for example, 10000 [ It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is terminated in response to reaching (times) ”(a“ special figure low probability state ”occurs).
In addition, when winning from “big hit 1” to “big hit 10”, the time reduction control is executed after the big hit gaming state ends.
Time-shortening control is started in response to the end of the big hit gaming state, winning a special symbol lottery (the “big hit symbol” is stopped and displayed), and a predetermined number of short hours (70 [times] in this embodiment). ), The special symbol notification display (variation display and stop display) is executed, and the process is terminated when one of them is established.

(About control commands)
Next, control commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300 and control commands transmitted / received between the main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 will be described.
The main control circuit 200 and the effect control circuit 300 are connected to each other via a serial communication harness. Here, communication between the main control circuit 200 and the effect control circuit 300 is performed only in one direction from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300, and communication from the effect control circuit 300 to the main control circuit 200 is performed. Not done.
Each control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300 is composed of 1-byte upper data indicating the type of the control command and 1-byte lower data indicating the contents of the control command. Yes.
Then, the main control circuit 200 transmits a control command composed of upper data and lower data to the effect control circuit 300 by serial communication. In the effect control circuit 300, when a control command is received from the main control circuit 200, a serial communication reception interrupt is generated, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, as control commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300, a symbol type designation command, a variation mode designation command, a variation pattern designation command, a stop designation command, a game state designation command, the number of holds A designation command, an opening designation command, a round start designation command, a round end designation command, an ending designation command, a first prefetch designation command, a second prefetch designation command, a third prefetch designation command, and the like are set.
The symbol type designation command is a command for designating a special symbol stop symbol type (a lottery result of special symbol lottery). The symbol type designation command designates a special symbol stop symbol type (one stop symbol number). The symbol type designation command is transmitted when the special symbol variable display is started. In the present embodiment, symbols corresponding to the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are set as the symbol type designation command.

The variation mode designation command is a command for designating the type of variation mode (variation mode number). The variation mode designation command designates the variation time associated with the variation mode number by designating the variation mode number. The variation mode designation command designates the variation time of the first half period (a mode of the first half period of the variation effect) of the special symbol variation display (variation effect).
In the present embodiment, m (plural) types of variation modes associated with different variation times are set as the variation mode types. The variation mode designation command designates one of the m types of variation modes (variation mode number) (“variation mode m”).
The variation pattern designation command is a command for designating a variation pattern type (variation pattern number). The variation pattern designation command designates the variation time associated with the variation pattern number by designating the variation pattern number. The variation pattern designation command designates the variation time of the latter half period (the aspect of the second half period of the variation effect) of the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol.
In the present embodiment, n (plural) types of variation patterns associated with different variation times are set as the variation pattern types. Then, the variation pattern designation command designates one of the n types of variation patterns (variation pattern number) (“variation pattern n”).
The variation mode designation command and the variation pattern designation command are transmitted at the start of variation display of the special symbol.

The stop designation command is a command for designating stop display of a special symbol (effect symbols z1, z2). The stop designation command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol stop display.
The game state designation command is a command for designating a game state (game state offset value).
Here, the “gaming state offset value” is information for designating the gaming state. In the present embodiment, as the gaming state offset value, each of the combinations of the value of the short-time control flag, the value of the special figure high probability state flag, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag, and the value of the big hit after rotation counter Corresponding numerical value is set.
The gaming state designation command designates one gaming state offset value. The game state designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on or when a special game phase to be described later is changed.
Here, as the gaming state offset value, the value of the short time control flag, the value of the special figure high probability state flag, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag, the value of the big hit after rotation counter, and the setting information storage area are stored. A numerical value corresponding to each of the combinations of the values (set values) being set may be set. Then, when transmitting the game state designation command, the value of the short time control flag, the value of the special figure high probability state flag, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag, the rotation number after the big hit, which are set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 Checking the counter value and the value stored in the setting information storage area, calculating a gaming state offset value corresponding to the confirmation result, and a gaming state designation command for designating the calculated gaming state offset value The sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 may be stored (transmitted to the effect control circuit 300).

The hold number designation command is a command for designating the hold number. In the present embodiment, the number-of-holds designation command designates that the number of holds (the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number) has increased by “1”, that the hold number has decreased by “1”, the hold number, etc. .
Here, the “special figure 1 hold number” means the number of the notice display (variation display and stop display) of the first special symbol on the special figure 1 display device 61 being held. Further, the “special figure 2 hold number” refers to the number of notification display (variation display and stop display) of the second special symbol on the special figure 2 display device 62 being held.
The number-of-holds designation command is transmitted when power is turned on, when starting information is stored, when a special symbol variation display is started, or the like. In the present embodiment, commands corresponding to the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are set as the hold number designation commands.

The opening designation command is a command for designating the start of the opening period (start of the big hit gaming state). The opening designation command designates the type of the big hit gaming state to be started (one type from “big hit 1” to “big hit 10”). The opening designation command is transmitted at the start of the opening period (at the start of the big hit gaming state).
The round start designation command is a command for designating the start of a round game. The round start designation command is transmitted at the start of the round game.
The round end designation command is a command for designating the end of the round game. The round end designation command is transmitted at the end of the round game.
The ending designation command is a command for designating the start of the ending period. The ending designation command is transmitted at the start of the ending period.

The first prefetching designation command is a command for designating a special symbol stop symbol type (one stop symbol number). In the present embodiment, the first prefetch designation command is set corresponding to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.
The second prefetch designation command is a command for designating the contents of the variation mode. Specifically, the second look-ahead designation command indicates that the type of variation mode is undefined (“undefined value”), or one of m types of variation modes (variation mode number) (“variation mode m”). ) Is specified. The second prefetch designation command is transmitted when starting information is stored.
The third prefetch designation command is a command for designating the contents of the variation pattern. Specifically, the third look-ahead designation command indicates that the type of variation pattern is undefined (“undefined value”) or one of n types of variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) (“variation pattern n”). ) Is specified. The third prefetch designation command is transmitted when starting information is stored.

The main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 is performed in both directions. Each control command transmitted / received between the main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 is composed of 1-byte data.
The main control circuit 200 transmits a control command to the payout control circuit 400 by serial communication. In the payout control circuit 400, when a control command is received from the main control circuit 200, a serial communication reception interrupt is generated, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing. Also, the payout control circuit 400 transmits a control command to the main control circuit 200 by serial communication. When receiving a control command from the payout control circuit 400, the main control circuit 200 generates a serial communication reception interrupt, and stores the data of the control command in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 by this interrupt processing.
In the pachinko machine 1, a prize ball number designation command or the like is set as a control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the payout control circuit 400.
The prize ball number designation command is a command for designating the number of prize balls to be paid out. In the present embodiment, the prize ball number designation command designates the payout of n (n = 1 to 15) prize balls. The award ball number designation command is transmitted when the award ball payout operation is executed by the payout control circuit 400.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, control commands transmitted from the payout control circuit 400 to the main control circuit 200 include occurrence / release of payout errors, occurrence / release of full tank errors, occurrence / release of ball clogging errors, etc. Control commands that specify each are set. Each control command is transmitted upon detection of occurrence / release of various errors.

(Processing executed by main control circuit 200)
Next, processing executed by the main control circuit 200 will be described.
First, the functions of the hardware configured in the main control circuit 200 will be described.
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the hard random number generation circuit 270 starts a hard random number update process.
In the hard random number update process, every time one clock is input from the frequency generation circuit 260 (in this embodiment, every 0.083 [μs]), the values of the first to third loop counters are within a predetermined range. Within the range (in the range of 0 to 65535 in the present embodiment) by one.
Also, in the hard random number update process, every time 32 clocks are input from the frequency generation circuit 260 (in this embodiment, every 2.666 [μs]), the value of the fourth loop counter is within a predetermined range (this In the embodiment, “1” is updated in the range of 0 to 10006.
The hard random number update process updates the normal symbol lottery random number, the first special symbol lottery big hit random number, the second special symbol lottery big hit random number, and the reach group random number. The hard random number update process is executed as a function of the hard random number generation circuit 270 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 described later based on software.
When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the transmission shift register of the output port 1 (output port 250) transmits a control command stored in the FIFO buffer to the effect control circuit 300. Start processing. The control command transmission process is executed as a function of the output port 1 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 described later based on software.

Next, a game control process executed by the CPU 210 of the main control circuit 200 based on a program (software) related to the progress of the game stored in the ROM 220 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the CPU initialization process.
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the CPU 210 starts the CPU initialization process shown in FIG. When the CPU initialization process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S1-1.
In step S1-1, an initial setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-2. In the initial setting process, a startup program is read from the ROM 220 and settings necessary for executing various processes are performed.
In step S1-2, a wait processing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-3. In the wait processing time setting process, a predetermined wait processing time is set in the timer counter. Then, measurement of the set wait processing time by the timer counter is started.
In step S1-3, a RAM clear signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-4. In the RAM clear signal reading process, the RAM clear signal is read.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a ram clear switch (not shown). When power is turned on while the ram clear switch is pressed, a ram clear signal is input to the input port 240 (input port 0).
In the RAM clear signal reading process, a value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the ram clear signal of the input port 240 is read.

In step S1-4, it is determined whether the wait processing time set in step S1-2 has elapsed. If it is determined that the wait processing time has elapsed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-5. If it is determined that the wait processing time has not elapsed (No), the process of step S1-4 is repeated.
In step S1-5, a RAM access permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-6. In the RAM access permission processing, processing necessary for permitting access to the work area of the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access permission process, a value corresponding to access permission is stored as a RAM protect value in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is permitted.
In step S1-6, based on the value read in step S1-3 (value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the ram clear signal), it is determined whether or not the ram clear signal is input. If it is determined that it has not been input (No), the process proceeds to step S1-7. If it is determined that a ram clear signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-17.

In step S1-7, it is determined whether or not power interruption occurrence information is stored in the power interruption occurrence information flag area of the RAM 230. If it is determined that the power interruption occurrence information is saved (Yes), If the process proceeds to S1-8 and it is determined that the power interruption occurrence information is not stored (No), the process proceeds to Step S1-17.
In step S1-8, a checksum calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-9. In the checksum calculation process, a checksum is calculated based on the backup information.
In the present embodiment, the backup information includes information stored in the use area M1 and information stored in the use area M1.
In step S1-9, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S1-8 is normal. If it is determined that the checksum is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-10. When it is determined that the checksum is not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-17.
If the checksum value calculated in step S1-8 matches the checksum value stored in the checksum buffer area, it is determined that the checksum is normal, and step S1. If the checksum value calculated in -8 does not match the checksum value stored in the checksum buffer area, it is determined that the checksum is not normal.

In step S1-10, a power shutdown occurrence information release process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-11. In the power cutoff occurrence information release process, the power cutoff occurrence information set in the power cutoff occurrence information flag area of the RAM 230 is released (erased).
In step S1-11, initialization processing at the time of power recovery is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-12. In the power recovery initialization process, the RAM 230 initializes data to be initialized (cleared) when the power is restored (when the data before the power is shut off) is maintained.
In step S1-12, a power recovery subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-13. In the power-return subcommand transmission process, a subcommand (control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300) designating that the power supply has been restored is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. To do. Further, a subcommand for designating a value set in the setting information storage area is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-13, a power supply return payout command transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the power return payout command transmission process, a payout command (control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the payout control circuit 400) designating that the power supply has been restored from the power shutdown is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. To do.

In step S1-14, an effect return subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-15. In the effect return subcommand transmission process, the effect return subcommand (power recovery return phase designation command, gaming state designation command, power supply restoration designation command, etc.) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Here, the “power supply restoration phase designation command” is a control command for designating a special game phase in which the performance is restored.
In the effect return subcommand transmission process, first, the current special game phase is confirmed based on the value of the special game phase flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. Then, a power return phase designation command for designating the confirmed special game phase is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Also, a gaming state offset value is calculated based on the current gaming state. Specifically, the value of the time reduction control flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230, the value of the special figure high probability state flag, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag, and the value of the rotation number counter after the big hit are confirmed. Then, a gaming state offset value corresponding to the confirmation result is calculated. Then, a gaming state designation command that designates the calculated gaming state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-15, an interrupt setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-16. In the interrupt initial setting process, the CTC (counter / timer circuit), which is a peripheral device, is initialized.
Specifically, the CPU 210 sets an interrupt vector register, and sets an interrupt count value (4.0 [ms] in the present embodiment) in the CTC.

In step S1-16, a set value changing process is executed, and the process proceeds to a main loop process (step S2-1). The setting value changing process will be described later.
In step S1-17, a RAM clear process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-18. In the RAM clear process, the RAM 230 is initialized.
Specifically, in the RAM clear process, information stored in the RAM 230 is cleared (erased). As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 230 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
That is, predetermined initial values are set as the values of various flag areas in the RAM 230 (time reduction control flag area, special figure high probability state flag area, previous big hit symbol flag area, special game phase flag area, normal game phase flag area, etc.) Is done. Also, predetermined initial values (“0” in the present embodiment) are set as the values of various counter areas (time-short counter area, big hit post-rotation counter area, etc.). Further, a predetermined initial value (“3” in the present embodiment) is set in the setting information storage area.
In step S1-18, RAM clear subcommand transmission processing is executed, and the flow proceeds to step S1-19. In the RAM clear subcommand transmission process, a subcommand designating that the RAM clear has been executed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM230. Further, the subcommand specifying the value (setting value = “3”) set in the setting information storage area is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-19, a RAM clear payout command transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the RAM clear payout command transmission process, a payout command designating that the RAM clear has been executed is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the setting value changing process in step S1-16 will be described.
FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the setting value changing process.
When the set value changing process is executed in step S1-16, as shown in FIG. 6, first, the process proceeds to step S1-20.
In step S1-20, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111. If it is determined that a detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111 (Yes), step S1 is performed. When the process proceeds to -21 and it is determined that the detection signal is not input from the key rotation detection switch 111, the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S2-1).
In step S1-21, set value display start processing is executed, and the flow proceeds to step S1-22. In the set value display start processing, display of the set value on the set value display device 66 is started.
Specifically, in the set value display start processing, the same value as the value (set value) set in the set information storage area is set in the set value display counter. Thereby, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the set value display device 66, the segment corresponding to the value of the set value display counter is controlled to be lit.
In step S1-22, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the set value selection switch 112. If it is determined that a detection signal is input from the set value selection switch 112 (Yes), step S1 is performed. When the process proceeds to -23 and it is determined that the detection signal is not input from the set value selection switch 112 (No), the process proceeds to step S1-25.

In step S1-23, a set value change process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-24. In the setting value changing process, the value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area is changed. Here, in this embodiment, every time a detection signal is input from the set value selection switch 112, a predetermined order (for example, set value = “1”, set value = “2”, set value = “3”, set value). Value = “4”, setting value = “5”, setting value = “6”, setting value = “1”, setting value = “2”.
In step S1-24, a set value display update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-25. In the set value display update process, the display of the set value on the set value display device 66 is updated.
Specifically, in the set value display update processing, the same value as the value (set value after change) set in the setting information storage area is set in the set value display counter. Thereby, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the set value display device 66, the segment corresponding to the value of the set value display counter is controlled to be lit.
In step S1-25, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111. If it is determined that a detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111 (Yes), step S1 is performed. If it is determined that the detection signal is not input from the key rotation detection switch 111, the process proceeds to step S1-26.
In step S1-26, set value display end processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (step S2-1). In the set value display end process, the display of the set value on the set value display device 66 is ended. Further, a subcommand designating a value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, main loop processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the main loop process.
When the CPU initialization process (step S1-15) shown in FIG. 5 ends, the CPU 210 starts the main loop process shown in FIG. When the main loop process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S2-1.
In step S2-1, an interrupt prohibition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-2. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt prohibition state for prohibiting interrupts of other processes is set. As a result, during a period in which the interrupt disabled state is set, execution of power-off saving processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S2-2, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-3. In the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
Here, the “initial value random number” is a random number for determining an initial value and an end value of a soft random number (a random symbol random number, a reach mode random number, a variation pattern random number, etc.) that is a random number generated in the program.
That is, the value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number is updated within a range from a preset initial value to an end value. The initial value and end value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number are changed every time the value of the loop counter reaches the end value. At this time, the initial value and end value of the loop counter are determined based on the initial value random number.

In step S2-3, main command analysis processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-4. In the main command analysis process, a main command received from the payout control circuit 400 (a control command transmitted from the payout control circuit 400 to the main control circuit 200) is analyzed, and a process corresponding to the analysis result is executed.
In step S2-4, a subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-5. In the subcommand transmission process, the subcommand stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 is output to the transmission data register of the output port 250 (output port 1).
As a result, the subcommand input to the transmission data register is stored (stored) in the FIFO buffer. Then, the subcommands stored in the FIFO buffer are transmitted to the effect control circuit 300 in a predetermined order by the transmission shift register.
In step S2-5, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-6. In the interrupt enable process, the interrupt disabled state is canceled. As a result, during the period from the execution of the interrupt permission process of step S2-5 to the execution of the interrupt prohibition process of step S2-1, execution of the power-off saving process, timer interrupt process, etc. is permitted. Interrupt enabled period.
In step S2-6, other random number update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-1. In the other random number update process, soft random numbers excluding the winning design random numbers (reach mode random numbers, fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc.) are updated.

Next, the power-off saving process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the power-off saving process.
The power supply circuit 600 is connected to a power cutoff detection circuit (not shown). The power shutdown detection circuit monitors the power supply voltage supplied by the power supply circuit 600, and outputs a power shutdown notice signal to the main control circuit 200 when the value of the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined reference value. .
When the CPU 210 receives the power shutdown notice signal, the CPU 210 starts the power saving shutdown process shown in FIG. 8 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop process. When the power saving shutdown process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S3-1.
In step S3-1, a register saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-2. In the register saving process, the register value used during the execution of the main loop process is saved in the saving area of the RAM 230.
In step S3-2, a power-off notice signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-3. In the power shutdown notice signal reading process, the power shutdown notice signal is read from the power shutdown detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power shutdown notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power shutdown notice signal of the input port 240 is read.
In step S3-3, based on the value read in step S3-2 (value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power shutdown notice signal), is the power shutdown notice signal input from the power shutdown detection circuit? If it is determined (bit check) and it is determined that the power shutdown notice signal is input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-4, and it is determined that the power shutdown notice signal is not input. In (No), it transfers to step S3-13.

In step S3-4, an output port stop process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-5. In the output port stop process, output of control signals and control commands by the output port 250 (output port 0 to output port 2) is stopped. Further, the detection signal input to the input port 240 (input port 0 to input port 3) is stopped.
In step S3-5, a checksum storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-6. In the checksum storage process, a checksum is calculated based on information stored in the use area M1 and the non-use area M2 of the RAM 230. Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum buffer area.
In step S3-6, a power interruption occurrence information setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-7. In the power shutdown occurrence information setting process, the power shutdown occurrence information is set (stored) in the power shutdown occurrence information flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S3-7, a RAM access prohibition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-8. In the RAM access prohibition process, a process for prohibiting access to the work area of the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access prohibition process, a value corresponding to access prohibition is stored as a RAM protect value in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the work area (including the use-prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is prohibited.

In step S3-8, a loop counter setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-9. In the loop counter setting process, a predetermined number of times of power-off notice signal reading is set as the value of the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-9, a power-off notice signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-10. In the power shutdown notice signal reading process, the power shutdown notice signal is read from the power shutdown detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power shutdown notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power shutdown notice signal of the input port 240 is read.
In step S3-10, based on the value read in step S3-9 (value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power shutdown notice signal), is the power shutdown notice signal input from the power shutdown detection circuit? If it is determined that the power-off notice signal is not input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-11, and if it is determined that the power-off notice signal is input (Yes). Shifts to Step S3-8.
In step S3-11, a loop counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-12. In the loop counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the return determination loop counter is newly set in the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-12, it is determined whether or not the value of the return determination loop counter is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is “0” (Yes), the CPU If the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S1-1) and it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S3-9.
In step S3-13, a register return process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process returns to the original process. In the register restoration process, the register value saved in step S3-1 is restored. Then, after the register restoration process is completed, the process returns to the main loop process (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.
The frequency generation circuit 260 generates an interrupt request signal every predetermined interrupt cycle (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment).
In response to the generation of the interrupt request signal, the CPU 210 starts the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop process. When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S4-1.
In step S4-1, a register saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-2. In the register saving process, all register values used during the execution of the main loop process are saved in the saving area of the RAM 230.
In step S4-2, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-3. In the interrupt permission process, an interrupt is permitted.
In step S4-3, dynamic port output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-4. In the dynamic port output process, a control signal is output to each of the display devices 60 to 63 (each LED).
Specifically, in the dynamic port output process, the drive information (drive signal) set in the dynamic port output request buffer of the RAM 230 is output to the output port 250 (output port 0). Accordingly, the display devices 60 to 63, 66, and 67 (each LED) are controlled to be turned on by the dynamic lighting method based on the drive signal set in the dynamic port output request buffer.

In step S4-4, port input processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-5. In the port input process, the latest switch state is accurately acquired.
Here, an input port 0 status flag area, an input port 1 status flag area, and an input port 2 status flag area are set in the RAM 230.
The input port 0 status flag area includes a switch status storage area corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor) input to the input port 0. In each switch state storage area, 1-bit data (a state in which a signal is input or a state in which a signal is not input) of a signal (detection sensor) corresponding to the switch state storage area (a state in which no signal is input) “1” or “0”) is set. Specifically, when a signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is input to each switch state storage area, “1” is set, and a signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is not input. Sometimes “0” is set.
In this embodiment, the input port 0 state flag area includes a switch state storage area corresponding to a detection signal from the radio wave detection sensor, a switch state storage area corresponding to a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor. From the switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal, the switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor, the switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the glass frame opening sensor, and the RAM clear switch A switch state storage area corresponding to the RAM clear signal, a switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the key rotation detection switch 111, a switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the set value selection switch, It is comprised including.

The input port 1 state flag area includes a switch state storage area corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor) input to the input port 1. In each switch state storage area, 1-bit data (“1” or “0”) indicating a switch state of a signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is set. Specifically, when a signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is input to each switch state storage area, “1” is set, and a signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is not input. Sometimes “0” is set.
In this embodiment, the input port 1 state flag area includes a switch state storage area corresponding to a detection signal from the upper left other winning ball detection sensor 106 and a switch state corresponding to a detection signal from the left middle other winning ball detection sensor 107. A storage area, a switch state storage area corresponding to a detection signal from the lower left other winning ball detection sensor 108, a switch state storage area corresponding to a detection signal from the right other winning ball detection sensor 105, and a big winning ball detection sensor 103 And a switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the out-sphere detection sensor 109.

The input port 2 state flag area includes a switch state storage area corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor) input to the input port 2. In each switch state storage area, 1-bit data (“1” or “0”) indicating a switch state of a signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is set. Specifically, when a signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is input to each switch state storage area, “1” is set, and a signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is not input. Sometimes “0” is set.
In the present embodiment, the input port 2 state flag area includes a switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the special figure 1 start ball detection sensor 101 and a switch corresponding to the detection signal from the special figure 2 start ball detection sensor 102. A state storage area, a switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the normal start ball detection sensor 104, and a switch state storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal from the power cutoff detection circuit. Yes.

Further, the RAM 230 is set with an input port 1 on detection flag area and an input port 2 on detection flag area.
The input port 1 ON detection flag area includes an ON state storage area corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor) input to the input port 1. In each on-state storage area, 1-bit data (“1” or “0”) indicating whether an on-state is detected for a signal corresponding to the on-state storage area is set. Specifically, each on-state storage area is set to “1” when an on-state is detected for a signal corresponding to the on-state storage area, and an on-state is set for a signal corresponding to the on-state storage area. When not detected, “0” is set.
Here, the “on state” refers to a state in which the signal is not input and the signal is input.
In the present embodiment, the input port 1 ON detection flag area includes an ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the upper left other winning ball detection sensor 106 and an ON signal corresponding to the detection signal from the left middle other winning ball detection sensor 107. A state storage area, an ON state storage area corresponding to a detection signal from the lower left other winning ball detection sensor 108, an ON state storage area corresponding to a detection signal from the right other winning ball detection sensor 105, and a big winning ball detection sensor The on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from 103 and the on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the out-sphere detection sensor 109 are configured.

In the following description, the value set (stored) in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the upper left other winning ball detection sensor 106 is “upper left other winning mouth switch bit data”, and the left middle other winning ball detection is performed. The value set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the sensor 107 is “left middle other winning opening switch bit data”, and the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the lower left other winning ball detection sensor 108. The value set in the left lower other winning opening switch bit data is set, and the value set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the right other winning ball detection sensor 105 is set as “right other winning opening switch bit. Data ”and the value set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the big winning ball detection sensor 103 is called“ big winning opening switch bit data ”. The value set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the ball detection sensor 109 and "out switch bit data".
That is, the input port 1 on detection flag (value set in the input port 1 on detection flag area) includes the upper left other winning opening switch bit data, the left middle other winning opening switch bit data, and the lower left other winning opening switch bit. Data, right other prize opening switch bit data, big prize opening switch bit data, and out switch bit data.

The input port 2 on detection flag area includes an on state storage area corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor) input to the input port 2. In each on-state storage area, 1-bit data (“1” or “0”) indicating whether an on-state is detected for a signal corresponding to the on-state storage area is set. Specifically, each on-state storage area is set to “1” when an on-state is detected for a signal corresponding to the on-state storage area, and an on-state is set for a signal corresponding to the on-state storage area. When not detected, “0” is set.
In the present embodiment, the input port 2 ON detection flag area corresponds to the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the special figure 1 start ball detection sensor 101 and the detection signal from the special figure 2 start ball detection sensor 102. An on-state storage area, an on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the normal start ball detection sensor 104, and an on-state storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal from the power cutoff detection circuit. ing.

In the following description, the value set (stored) in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the special figure 1 start ball detection sensor 101 is referred to as "first start port switch bit data", and the special figure 2 start ball The value set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the detection sensor 102 is “second start port switch bit data”, and the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the general start ball detection sensor 104 The value set to “gate switch bit data” is referred to as “gate switch bit data”, and the value set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal from the power cutoff detection circuit is referred to as “power cutoff switch bit data”.
That is, the input port 2 on detection flag (value set in the input port 2 on detection flag area) includes the first start port switch bit data, the second start port switch bit data, the gate switch bit data, the power supply And cut-off switch bit data.

In the port input process, first, a value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal of the input port 0 is read. Based on the read value, the value of each switch state storage area in the input port 0 state flag area is updated.
Specifically, when “1” is set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal, “1” is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal, and the reception storage corresponding to the signal is performed. When “0” is set in the area, “0” is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal.

Next, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal of the input port 1 is read. Then, based on the read value and the value set in each switch state storage area of the input port 1 state flag area (value set in the process related to the previous step S4-4), the input port 1 ON The value (each switch bit data) in each ON state storage area of the detection flag area is updated.
Specifically, for each signal, the value set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal (the value set in the previous step S4-4) and the reception storage area corresponding to the signal. Check the set value. For each signal, when “0” is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal and “1” is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal, the signal “1” is set in the on-state storage area corresponding to, and “0” is set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the signal in other cases.
Here, “other cases” means that “0” is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal and “0” is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal. When “1” is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal and “0” is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal, and the switch state corresponding to the signal This is the case where “1” is set in the storage area and “1” is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal.
Next, based on the read value (value set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal of the input port 1), the value of each switch state storage area of the input port 1 state flag area is updated.
Specifically, when “1” is set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal, “1” is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal, and the reception storage corresponding to the signal is performed. When “0” is set in the area, “0” is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal.
Thus, for each signal, the value set in the switch state storage area in the previous step S4-4 is “0”, and the value set in the switch state storage area in the current step S4-4 is “0”. If it is “1”, “1” is set in the ON state storage area in this step S4-4 (ON state is detected).

Next, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal of the input port 2 is read. Based on the read value and the value set in each switch state storage area of the input port 2 state flag area (the value set in the process related to the previous step S4-4), the input port 2 ON The value (switch bit data) of each on-state storage area in the detection flag area is updated.
Specifically, for each signal, the value set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal (the value set in the previous step S4-4) and the reception storage area corresponding to the signal. Check the set value. For each signal, when “0” is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal and “1” is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal, the signal “1” is set in the on-state storage area corresponding to, and “0” is set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the signal in other cases.
Here, “other cases” means that “0” is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal and “0” is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal. When “1” is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal and “0” is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal, and the switch state corresponding to the signal This is the case where “1” is set in the storage area and “1” is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal.
Next, based on the read value (value set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal of the input port 2), the value of each switch state storage area of the input port 2 state flag area is updated.
Specifically, when “1” is set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal, “1” is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal, and the reception storage corresponding to the signal is performed. When “0” is set in the area, “0” is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal.
Thus, for each signal, the value set in the switch state storage area in the previous step S4-4 is “0”, and the value set in the switch state storage area in the current step S4-4 is “0”. If it is “1”, “1” is set in the ON state storage area in this step S4-4 (ON state is detected).

In step S4-5, timer update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-6. In the timer update process, various timers are updated. Specifically, in the timer update process, the values of various timer counters (special game timer, normal game timer, external information timer, etc.) are updated.
In step S4-6, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-7. The initial value random number update process in step S4-6 is the same process as the initial value random number update process in step S2-2. Specifically, in the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
In step S4-7, a winning symbol random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-8. In the winning symbol random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the winning symbol random number among the soft random numbers is updated.
In step S4-8, switch management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-9. In the switch management process, a process (such as acquisition of various random numbers) according to the state of each start ball detection sensor 101, 102, 104 (whether or not an on state is detected) is executed. The switch management process will be described later.
In step S4-9, a special game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-10. In the special game management process, the operation of the special figure display devices 61 and 62 and the operation of the special electric accessory 53a are managed. The special game management process will be described later.
In step S4-10, a normal game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-11. In the normal game management process, the operation of the general-purpose display device 60 and the operation of the normal electric accessory 52a are managed. The normal game management process will be described later.

In step S4-11, an error management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-12. In the error management process, various errors (abnormal conditions) are determined, and settings are made according to the determination results.
In step S4-12, a winning opening switch process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-13. In the winning opening switch processing, processing (update of various counters, etc.) according to the state of each of the detection sensors 101 to 103 and 105 to 109 (whether or not an on state is detected) is executed.
In step S4-13, a payout control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-14. In the payout control management process, a payout command is generated based on the value of the prize ball control counter set in step S4-12, and the generated payout command is transmitted.
In the present embodiment, as the prize ball control counter, the prize ball control counter 1 that stores the number of ball game balls that have entered the big prize opening 53 and the number of ball game balls that have entered the right other prize opening 54 are stored. The prize ball control counter 2, the prize ball control counter 3 in which the number of ball game balls entered in the upper left / left middle / lower left winning holes 55 to 57 are stored, and the ball game ball entered in the first start opening 51 And the prize ball control counter 4 in which the number of ball game balls that have entered the second start port 52 are stored.

In the payout control management process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is “1” or more, a payout command for designating a predetermined number (15 [balls] in this embodiment) of payout balls is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. After that, when the payout of the prize ball by the game ball payout device 440 is completed, the payout control circuit 400 transmits a main command designating the completion of the payout to the main control circuit 200. Then, “1” is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 1 in response to reception of the main command designating completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is “1” or more, a payout command for designating a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]) of payout balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. Thereafter, “1” is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 2 in response to reception of the main command designating completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is “1” or more, a payout command for designating a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]) of payout balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. Thereafter, “1” is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 3 in response to reception of the main command designating completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is “1” or more, a payout command for designating a predetermined number (3 balls in this embodiment) of prize balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. Thereafter, “1” is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 4 in response to reception of the main command designating completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is “1” or more, a payout command for designating a predetermined number (1 [ball] in the present embodiment) of the prize balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. Thereafter, “1” is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 5 in response to reception of the main command designating completion of the payout.

In step S4-14, a launch position designation management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-15. In the launch position designation management process, a process related to launch position designation is executed.
Specifically, in the launch position designation management process, when changing from a state in which the launch of the game ball to the left route is designated to a state in which the launch of the game ball to the right route is designated (at the start of the big hit gaming state, etc.) In addition, a subcommand designating launching of the game ball to the right path is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a subcommand for designating the launch of the game ball on the right path is transmitted to the effect control circuit 300.
In step S4-15, external information management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-16. In the external information management process, external information (external signal) to be output to the hall computer 450 is set.
Specifically, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information start port counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [sphere] in the present embodiment). If it is determined that the value of the external information start port counter has reached a predetermined value, external information indicating that the number of balls entering the start ports 51 and 52 has reached a predetermined number is stored in the port of the RAM 230. Store in the output request buffer. Thereafter, a predetermined value (1 [sphere] in the present embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information start port counter.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information out switch counter has reached a predetermined value. When it is determined that the value of the external information out switch counter has reached a predetermined value, external information indicating that the number of detected game balls detected by the out ball detection sensor 109 has reached a predetermined number is stored in the RAM 230. Store in port output request buffer. Thereafter, a predetermined value is subtracted from the value of the external information out switch counter.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information timer (timer counter) is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the external information timer is “1” or more, external information indicating the occurrence of an abnormal state is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S4-16, a test signal management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-17. In the test signal management process, test information (test signal) is set.
Specifically, in the test signal management process, test information indicating an internal state (such as a big hit gaming state, an execution state of time reduction control, a probability state of special symbol lottery) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-17, a base ratio calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-18. The base ratio calculation process will be described later.
In step S4-18, an LED display setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. In the LED display setting process, drive information (drive signal) for lighting control of each display device 60 to 63, 66, 67 (each LED) is set in the dynamic port output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-19, solenoid data setting processing is executed, and the flow proceeds to step S4-20. In the solenoid data setting process, drive information (drive signal) output to the solenoids 64 and 65 is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S4-20, port output processing is executed, and the flow proceeds to step S4-21. In the port output process, various signals are output to the hall computer 450, the solenoids 64 and 65, and the like.
Specifically, in the port output process, various information (external signals, control signals, etc.) set in the port output request buffer is output to the output port 250 (output port 0). As a result, the external signal set in the port output request buffer is output to the hall computer 450 via the payout control circuit 400 and the external terminal board 420. Further, the solenoids 64 and 65 are driven and controlled based on the drive signal set in the port output request buffer.
In step S4-21, a register return process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process returns to the original process. In the register restoration process, the register value saved in step S4-1 is restored. Then, after the register restoration process is completed, the process returns to the main loop process (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

Next, the switch management process in step S4-8 will be described.
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the switch management process.
When the switch management process is executed in step S4-8, as shown in FIG. 10, first, the process proceeds to step S5-1.
In step S5-1, it is determined whether or not the on-state of the general-purpose start ball detection sensor 104 has been detected. If it is determined that the on-state of the general-purpose start ball detection sensor 104 has been detected (Yes), If the process proceeds to S5-2 and it is determined that the on-state of the normal start ball detection sensor 104 is not detected (No), the process proceeds to Step S5-3.
Here, when “1” is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the normal start ball detection sensor 104 (when the gate switch bit data of the input port 2 ON detection flag is “1”). In the case where it is determined that the ON state of the general-purpose start ball detection sensor 104 has been detected, and “0” is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the general-purpose start ball detection sensor 104 (input port) When the gate switch bit data of the 2-on detection flag is “0”), it is determined that the on-state of the normal start ball detection sensor 104 is not detected.
In step S5-2, a normal start ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-3. The normal start ball detection process will be described later.

In step S5-3, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 is detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 is detected (Yes), When the process proceeds to step S5-4 and it is determined that the on-state of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 is not detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-5.
Here, when “1” is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the special figure 1 start ball detection sensor 101 (the first start port switch bit data of the input port 2 ON detection flag is “1”). ), It is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start ball detection sensor 101 has been detected, and "0" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the special figure 1 start ball detection sensor 101. If the first start port switch bit data of the input port 2 ON detection flag is “0”, it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start ball detection sensor 101 is not detected.
In step S5-4, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-5. The special figure 1 starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-5, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 has been detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 has been detected (Yes), When the process proceeds to step S5-6 and it is determined that the on-state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 is not detected (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S4-9) is performed. ).
Here, when “1” is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the special figure 2 start ball detection sensor 102 (the second start port switch bit data of the input port 2 ON detection flag is “1”). ), It is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 has been detected, and "0" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102. If the second start port switch bit data of the input port 2 ON detection flag is “0”, it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start ball detection sensor 102 is not detected.
In step S5-6, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-9). The special figure 2 starting ball detection process will be described later.

Next, the normal starting ball detection process in step S5-2 will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a general-purpose starting ball detection process.
When the normal starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-2, as shown in FIG. 11, first, the process proceeds to step S6-1.
In step S6-1, a normal random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-2. In the normal random number acquisition process, a random number (random value) is acquired (loaded) from a loop counter corresponding to the normal symbol lottery.
In step S6-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the general-purpose hold number counter is an upper limit value (in this embodiment, “1”), and it is determined that the value of the general-purpose hold number counter is not the upper limit value. In (No), the process proceeds to step S6-3, and when it is determined that the value of the general-purpose hold number counter is the upper limit value (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S5- Move to 3).
In step S6-3, the usual figure holding number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-4. In the usual figure pending number counter update process, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the usual figure pending number counter is newly set in the usual figure pending number counter.
In step S6-4, a regular random number storage process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3). In the usual random number saving process, the winning random number acquired in step S6-1 is stored in the usual figure starting information storage area of the RAM 230 as ordinary figure starting information.

Next, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process of step S5-4 will be described.
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 1 start ball detection process is executed in step S5-4, as shown in FIG. 12, first, the process proceeds to step S7-1.
In step S7-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230.
In step S7-2, a holding number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-3. In the holding number counter address setting process, the address of the special figure 1 holding number counter is set in the holding number counter address setting area of the RAM 230.
In step S7-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

Next, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process of step S5-6 will be described.
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-6, as shown in FIG. 13, first, the process proceeds to step S8-1.
In step S8-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230.
In step S8-2, a holding number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-3. In the holding number counter address setting process, the address of the special figure 2 holding number counter is set in the holding number counter address area of the RAM 230.
In step S8-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-9). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

Next, the special symbol random number acquisition process in steps S7-3 and S8-3 will be described.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a special symbol random number acquisition process.
When the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed in steps S7-3 and S8-3, as shown in FIG. 14, the process first proceeds to step S9-1.
In step S9-1, a special symbol identification value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-2. In the special symbol identification value acquisition process, the special symbol identification value set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-2, a special figure hold number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-3. In the special figure hold number acquisition process, the value of the special figure hold number counter (special figure 1 hold number counter or special figure 2 hold number counter) specified by the address set in the hold number counter address area (special figure 1 hold number) Number or special figure 2 hold number) is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-3, a special figure random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-4. In the special figure random number acquisition processing, various random numbers (random values) such as jackpot random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach group random numbers, reach mode random numbers, variation pattern random numbers are acquired (loaded) from the loop counter corresponding to each lottery. At this time, the corresponding loop counter is selected based on the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1.
In step S9-4, it is determined whether or not the special figure hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) acquired in step S9-2 is an upper limit value ("4" in the present embodiment). If it is determined that the special figure hold number is not the upper limit value (No), the process proceeds to step S9-5. If it is determined that the special figure hold number is the upper limit value (Yes), a series of processes is performed. And the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-9 or S5-5).
In step S9-5, a special figure holding number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-6. In the special figure hold number counter update process, the value set in the special figure hold number counter (special figure 1 hold number counter or special figure 2 hold number counter) specified by the address set in the hold number counter address area A value obtained by adding “1” to is newly set in the special figure holding number counter.

In step S9-6, a special figure random number storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-7. In the special figure random number storing process, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as special figure start information (special figure 1 start information or special figure 2 start information) as a special figure start information storage area (special figure 1 start). Information storage area or special figure 2 start information storage area).
Specifically, the RAM 230 stores a changing start information storage area in which start information during execution of special symbol notification display is stored, and a special figure 1 start information in which start determination is suspended. It includes a start information storage area and a special figure 2 start information storage area where start determination is suspended.
The special figure 1 start information storage area includes a first storage part to a fourth storage part as a storage part capable of storing the special figure 1 start information. Different priority orders are defined in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit. That is, the priority order of each storage unit is defined to be the first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit (upper order → lower order) in descending order of priority. . The special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area is subjected to start determination in order from the special figure 1 start information stored in the higher priority storage unit.
The special figure 2 start information storage area includes a first storage part to a fourth storage part as a storage part capable of storing the special figure 2 start information. Different priority orders are defined in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit. That is, the priority order of each storage unit is defined to be the first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit (upper order → lower order) in descending order of priority. . And the special figure 2 starting information memorize | stored in the special figure 2 starting information storage area performs starting determination in an order from the special figure 2 starting information memorize | stored in the memory | storage part with a high priority.
If the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as the special diagram 1 start information. 1 Store in the start information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the highest priority storage unit among the free storage units. Specifically, when the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = “1”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the first storage unit. On the other hand, if the current value of the special figure 1 holding number counter = “2”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the second storage unit. If the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = “3”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the third storage unit. If the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = “4”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the fourth storage unit.
On the other hand, when the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as the special diagram 2 starting information. 2 Store in the start information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the highest priority storage unit among the free storage units. Specifically, when the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter = “1”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the first storage unit. On the other hand, if the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter = “2”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the second storage unit. If the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter = “3”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the third storage unit. When the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter = “4”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the fourth storage unit.

  In step S9-7, the number-of-holds designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-8. In the hold number designation command setting process, a hold number designation command for designating that the special figure hold number (the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number) has increased by “1” is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. To do. At this time, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the number-of-holds designation command for designating that the number of special symbol 1 reservations has increased by "1" Is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230, and if the value corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, a hold number designation command for designating that the special figure 2 hold number has increased by "1" is stored in the RAM 230. Is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S9-8, a pre-determination process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-9 or S5-5). In the pre-determination process, the start information (the special figure 1 start information or the special figure) saved (stored) in the special figure start information storage area (the special figure 1 start information storage area or the special figure 2 start information storage area) in step S9-6. (2 start information) (hereinafter referred to as “preliminary determination start information”), various lottery results are determined in advance.
In this embodiment, pre-determination of various lottery results is executed for all start information (Special Figure 1 start information and Special Figure 2 start information).
Note that the start information acquired (stored) during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state may be configured such that prior determination of various lottery results is not executed. In addition, for the special figure 2 start information acquired (stored) during stoppage of the time reduction control, the advance determination of various lottery results is not executed, and the special figure 1 start information acquired (stored) during execution of the time reduction control. As for, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed.

In the preliminary determination process, first, a preliminary special figure winning determination process is executed.
In the special special symbol winning determination process, a special symbol lottery result ("big hit" or "out of game") is determined (preliminary special symbol winning determination).
The ROM 220 stores a special symbol winning lottery table in which special bonus lottery values are registered. In addition, the special figure winning lottery table corresponds to each combination of a set value ("1" to "6") and a gaming state ("special figure low probability state" or "special figure high probability state"). The special figure winning lottery table is stored.
Specifically, as the special figure winning lottery table, “setting value 1 low-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, “setting value 1 high-accuracy special drawing winning lottery table”, and “setting value 2 low-probability special lottery table”. "Figure winning lottery table", "Set value 2 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table", "Set value 3 low accuracy special figure winning lottery table" and "Set value 3 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table" “Set value 4 low-accuracy special map winning lottery table”, “Set value 4 high-accuracy special map winning lottery table”, “Set value 5 low-accuracy special map winning lottery table”, “Setting value A “5 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, a “set value 6 low-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, and a “set value 6 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table” are stored.

In the “set value 1 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “1” and “0” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure low probability state” Selected). In the “set value 1 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “204” are registered as big hit values.
In the “set value 1 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “1” and “1” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure high probability state”) Selected). In the “set value 1 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “2039” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.
In the “set value 2 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “2” and “0” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure low probability state” Selected). In the “set value 2 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “209” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.
In the “set value 2 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “2” and “1” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of the “special figure high probability state”) Selected). In the “set value 2 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “2089” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.
In the “set value 3 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “3” and “0” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure low probability state” Selected). In the “set value 3 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “214” of the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.
In the “set value 3 high probability special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “3” and “1” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure high probability state” Selected). In the “set value 3 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “2139” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.

In the “set value 4 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “4” and “0” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure low probability state” Selected). In the “set value 4 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “219” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.
In the “set value 4 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “4” and “1” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure high probability state” Selected). In the “set value 4 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “2189” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.
In the “set value 5 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “5” and “0” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure low probability state” Selected). In the “set value 5 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “224” are registered as big hit values.
In the “set value 5 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “5” and “1” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure high probability state” Selected). In the “set value 5 high-precision special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “2239” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.
In the “set value 6 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “6” and “0” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure low probability state” Selected). In the “set value 5 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “229” are registered as big hit values.
In the “set value 6 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “6” and “1” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure high probability state”) Selected). In the “set value 6 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “2289” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.

In the special special chart winning determination process, the value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area and the current gaming state ("high special probability state" or "low special probability state") are confirmed. The special figure winning lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the preliminary determination start information and the read special symbol winning lottery table, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is “big hit” (preliminary special symbol winning determination). .
Specifically, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the pre-determination start information matches the jackpot value registered in the read special symbol winning lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is set to “big hit” (Winning) is determined.
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the pre-judgment start information does not match the jackpot value registered in the read special figure winning lottery table (if it matches the outlier value), the special symbol The result of the lottery is determined to be “out” (decision).

In the pre-determination process, next, pre-special drawing stop symbol determination is executed. In the pre-special symbol stop symbol determination process, the special symbol stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is determined (pre-special symbol stop symbol determination).
In the present embodiment, five types (“one jackpot symbol” to “5 jackpot symbol”) are defined as the types of “big jackpot symbol” corresponding to the first special symbol lottery. In addition, five types (“6 big hits” to “10 big hits”) are set as the types of “big hit symbols” corresponding to the second special symbol lottery.
Then, 50 “hit symbols” are defined as “hit symbols” (stop symbol numbers) belonging to “hit 1 symbol”. In addition, 20 “hit symbols” are defined as “hit symbols” (stop symbol numbers) belonging to “2 jackpot symbols”. In addition, five “hit symbols” are defined as “hit symbols” (stop symbol numbers) belonging to “3 jackpot symbols”. In addition, ten “hit symbols” are defined as “hit symbols” (stop symbol numbers) belonging to “4 jackpot symbols”. Fifteen types of “hit symbols” are defined as “hit symbols” (stop symbol numbers) belonging to “5 jackpot symbols”.
As a result, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, the “big hit symbol” (specifically, the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state becomes “the special symbol low probability state” with a probability of 50% (specifically, , "Big jackpot symbol"), and with a 50% probability, the game state after the end of the big jackpot gaming state will be "Special figure high probability state" (specifically, "Big jackpot two symbols") ”To“ 5 jackpots ”) are selected.
On the other hand, 20 “hit symbols” are defined as “hit symbols” (stop symbol numbers) belonging to “6 jackpot symbols”. Further, 50 “hit symbols” are defined as “hit symbols” (stop symbol numbers) belonging to “7 jackpot symbols”. In addition, 15 “hit symbols” are defined as “hit symbols” (stop symbol numbers) belonging to “8 jackpot symbols”. In addition, ten “hit symbols” are defined as “hit symbols” (stop symbol numbers) belonging to “9 jackpot symbols”. Five types of “hit symbols” are defined as “hit symbols” (stop symbol numbers) belonging to “hit 10 symbols”.
As a result, when the first special symbol lottery is executed, the “big hit symbol” (specifically, the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state becomes “the special symbol low probability state” with a probability of 50% (specifically, , “7 jackpot symbols” is selected, and the game state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes “special figure high probability state” with a probability of 50% (specifically, “six jackpot symbols”) , “8 jackpots” to “10 jackpots”) are selected.

The ROM 220 stores a big hit symbol lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the hit symbol random number and the stop symbol number (stop symbol number corresponding to “big hit symbol”) is registered.
Further, as the big hit symbol lottery table, a big hit symbol lottery table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery and a big hit symbol lottery table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery are stored.
In the jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, stop symbol numbers corresponding to “one jackpot symbol” to “five jackpot symbols” are registered as stop symbol numbers. On the other hand, in the jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, stop symbol numbers corresponding to “big jackpot 6 symbols” to “big jackpot 10 symbols” are registered as stop symbol numbers.
In the pre-special symbol stop symbol determination process, when it is determined that the jackpot symbol (winning) is determined by the pre-special symbol winning determination, the type (stop symbol number) of the jackpot symbol is determined (pre-special symbol stop symbol determination).
Specifically, when the pre-determined start information is special figure 1 start information, based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determined start information and the jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery The type of the big hit symbol (stop symbol number) is determined. On the other hand, if the pre-determined start information is special figure 2 start information, the big win symbol is based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determined start information and the jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery Type (stop symbol number) is determined.
On the other hand, in the pre-special symbol stop symbol determination process, if it is determined to be “out of” (decision) by the pre-special symbol winning determination, “stop symbol” (“extra symbol” is selected as the stop symbol type (stop symbol number). Is determined (preliminary special symbol stop symbol determination).

Next, in the pre-determination process, a first prefetch designation command setting process is executed.
In the first prefetch designation command setting process, a first prefetch designation command for designating the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number) determined by the pre-special symbol stop symbol determination is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, in the pre-determination process, it is determined whether or not it is determined as “big hit” (winning) by the pre-special drawing winning determination.
Then, if it is determined that “big hit” (winning) is determined by the pre-special drawing winning determination, the pre-special drawing variation mode determining process at the time of winning is executed.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the previous special figure winning determination is “disappearance” (decision), the pre-special drawing variation state determination process at the time of loss is executed.

In the winning special figure variation mode determination process, first, the type of the variation mode (variation mode number) is determined (pre-variation mode determination at the time of winning).
The ROM 220 stores a winning variation mode determination table in which the correspondence between the reach mode random number and the variation mode type (variation mode number) is registered.
In addition, as the winning mode variation mode judgment table, the type of jackpot symbol ("one jackpot symbol" to "10 jackpot symbol"), the gaming state ("special chart high probability state" or "special chart low probability state", hourly counter And the winning variation mode determination table corresponding to the combination of the value and the like.
In the present embodiment, the fluctuation mode type (variation mode number) is defined as “pseudo-continuous fluctuation”, “pseudo-continuous 2 fluctuation”, “pseudo-continuous 3 fluctuation”, and “pseudo-continuous 4 fluctuation”. Has been.
In addition, a plurality of variation modes (variation pattern numbers) associated with different variation times are defined as variation modes (variation pattern numbers) belonging to “variation without pseudo-continuations”.
The expectation level of each type is, in descending order of expectation, types belonging to “pseudo-continuous 4 variation”, “pseudo-continuous 3 variation”, “pseudo-continuous 2 variation”, and “pseudo-continuous variation” (high expectation level → (Expectation is low).
The “expected degree” refers to the possibility (degree) of occurrence of a big hit gaming state when the type of the variation mode is selected.
In each winning variation mode determination table, the types of variation modes (variation mode numbers) are registered as “pseudo-continuous 2 variation”, “pseudo-continuous 3 variation”, and “pseudo-continuous 4 variation”. ("Fluctuation without quasi-ream" is not registered).

In the pre-variation mode determination at the time of winning, first of all, the type of jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) determined by the prior special symbol stop symbol determination and the gaming state ("special symbol high probability state" or "special symbol low probability state", The value of the hourly time counter, etc.) is confirmed, and the winning variation mode determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, the type (variation mode number) of the variation mode is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the preliminary determination start information and the read variation mode determination table at the time of winning.

In the winning special figure variation mode determination process, next, a second prefetch designation command setting process is executed.
In the second prefetch designation command setting process, a second prefetch designation command for designating the type of variation mode (variation mode number) determined by the pre-variation mode determination at the time of winning is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In the pre-special drawing variation mode determination process at the time of winning, next, the type (variation pattern number) of the variation pattern is determined (pre-variation pattern determination at the time of winning).
The ROM 220 stores a winning variation pattern determination table in which correspondence between a variation pattern random number and a variation pattern type (variation pattern number) is registered.
In addition, as the winning variation pattern determination table, the type of jackpot symbol (“one jackpot symbol” to “10 jackpot symbol”), the gaming state (“special chart high probability state” or “special chart low probability state”, hourly counter And the winning variation pattern determination table corresponding to the combination of the variation mode type and the type of variation mode.
In the present embodiment, “variation without reach”, “normal reach variation”, and “super reach variation” are defined as the types of variation patterns (variation pattern numbers).
A plurality of variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) associated with different variation times are defined as variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) belonging to “unreachable variation”.
In addition, a plurality of variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) associated with different variation times are defined as variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) belonging to “normal reach variation”.
In addition, as variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) belonging to “super reach variation”, a plurality of variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) associated with different variation times are defined.
In the present embodiment, as a variation pattern (variation pattern number) belonging to “super reach variation”, “super reach variation 1”, “super reach variation 2”, “super reach variation 3”, and “super reach variation 4”. "And" Super reach fluctuation 5 ".
The expectation level of each type is defined to be “super reach fluctuation”, “normal reach fluctuation”, and “non-reach fluctuation” (high expectation → low expectation) in descending order of expectation.
In addition, the expectation level of each variation pattern belonging to “super reach variation” is “super reach variation 5”, “super reach variation 4”, “super reach variation 3”, “super reach variation” in descending order of expectation. 2 ”and“ Super Reach Variation 1 ”(high expectation → low expectation).
The “expected degree” refers to the possibility (degree) that a big hit gaming state will occur when the type of the variation pattern is selected.
In each winning variation pattern determination table, “normal reach variation” and “super reach variation” are registered as variation pattern types (variation pattern numbers) (“reach-less variation” is registered). Not)

In the pre-variation pattern determination at the time of winning, first of all, the type of jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) determined by the prior special symbol stop symbol determination and the gaming state ("special symbol high probability state" or "special symbol low probability state", The value of the time reduction counter, etc.) and the type of fluctuation mode (fluctuation mode number) determined by the prior fluctuation mode determination at the time of winning are confirmed, and a winning fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the preliminary determination start information and the read variation pattern determination table at the time of winning.

In the pre-special drawing variation mode determination process at the time of winning, next, a third prefetch designation command setting process is executed.
In the third prefetch designation command setting process, a third prefetch designation command that designates the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) determined by the pre-variation pattern determination at the time of winning is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

On the other hand, in the prior special figure variation mode determination process at the time of loss, first, the type of reach group random number (“indefinite value” or “fixed value”) included in the pre-determination start information is determined (pre-random number type determination).
In the present embodiment, “undefined value” and “fixed value” are defined as the types of reach group random numbers.
“Undefined value” means that when starting information (Special Figure 1 starting information or Special Figure 2 starting information) is acquired (stored), the type of fluctuation mode (variation mode number) and the type of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) are determined. It is not changed at the start of the special symbol fluctuation display based on the start information (when executing step S11-7) based on the number of holdings at that time (number of holdings of special figure 1 or special figure 2) The type of mode (variation mode number) and the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) are determined.
“Fixed value” means acquisition of start information (special figure 1 start information or special figure 2 start information) regardless of the number of holdings at the start of special symbol fluctuation display (when step S11-7 is executed). At the time of storage (when executing step S9-8), the type of variation mode (variation mode number) and the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) are determined.
In the present embodiment, the value of the reach group random number is updated within the range of “0” to “10006”. Of “0” to “10006”, “0” to “8499” are “indefinite values”, and “8500” to “10006” are “fixed values”.
Therefore, in the prior random number type determination, when the value of the reach group random number included in the preliminary determination start information is less than “8500”, it is determined as “undefined value”, and the reach group random number included in the preliminary determination start information is determined. When the value is “8500” or more, it is determined as “fixed value”.

In the pre-selection special figure variation mode determination process at the time of defeat, if it is determined as “fixed value” by the pre-random number type determination, pre-reach group determination and pre-change pre-variation mode determination are further executed.
On the other hand, in the advance special figure variation mode determination process at the time of loss, if it is determined as “indefinite value” by the prior random number type determination, the advance reach group determination and the advance variation mode determination at the time of loss are not executed.
In the advance reach group determination, the type of reach group (reach group number) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a reach group determination table in which correspondences between reach mode random numbers and reach group types (reach group numbers) are registered.
In addition, an indefinite value reach group determination table and a fixed value reach group determination table are stored as the reach group determination table.
In the present embodiment, “reach group 1”, “reach group 2”, and “reach group 3” are defined as the types of reach groups.
In the indefinite value reach group determination table, only “reach group 1” is registered as the reach group type (“reach group 2” and “reach group 3” are not registered).
On the other hand, in the fixed value reach group determination table, only “reach group 2” and “reach group 3” are registered as the reach group type (“reach group 1” is not registered).
As described above, the prior reach group determination is executed only when it is determined as “fixed value” by the prior random number type determination.
In the advance reach group determination, the fixed value reach group determination table is read. Then, the type of the reach group is determined based on the reach group random number included in the pre-determination start information and the read fixed value reach group determination table.

In the pre-change mode determination at the time of loss, the type of change mode (change mode number) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a selection mode change mode determination table in which correspondence between the reach mode random number and the change mode type (change mode number) is registered.
Furthermore, as the loss mode fluctuation mode determination table, “loss mode change mode determination table 1” corresponding to “reach group 1”, “failure change mode determination table 2” corresponding to “reach group 2”, and “reach” "Disappointment variation mode determination table 3" corresponding to "Group 3" is stored.
In addition, as the “Disappointing Fluctuation Mode Determination Table 1”, it corresponds to each combination of the number of holds (Special figure 1 hold number or Special figure 2 hold number) and the execution status (running or stopped) of the time-saving control. The “decision change mode determination table 1” is stored.

In the “decision fluctuation mode determination table 1”, only “no quasi-continuous fluctuation” is registered as the fluctuation mode type (variation mode number) (“pseudo-continuous 2 fluctuation”, “pseudo-continuous 3 fluctuation”). "And" Pseudo-ream 4 variation "are not registered).
Further, the contents of the “decision variable mode determination table 1” corresponding to each number of holds are set so that the variation mode type (variation mode number) associated with a short variation time is selected as the number of suspensions increases. Yes.
In the “decided fluctuation mode determination table 2”, “pseudo continuous 2 fluctuation” and “pseudo continuous 3 fluctuation” are registered as types of fluctuation modes (variation mode numbers) (“pseudo continuous fluctuation”). "And" Pseudo-ream 4 variation "are not registered).
In the “decided change mode determination table 3”, “pseudo continuous 2 change” and “pseudo continuous 3 change” are registered as the types of change modes (change mode numbers) (“pseudo continuous change”). "And" Pseudo-ream 4 variation "are not registered).

As described above, the pre-change mode determination at the time of loss is performed only when it is determined as “fixed value” by the prior random number type determination.
In the pre-variation mode determination at the time of loss, first, the type of reach group determined by the pre-reach group determination is confirmed, and a loss mode variable mode determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, the type (variation mode number) of the variation mode is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the pre-determination start information and the read selection mode variation mode determination table.

In the special special figure variation mode determination process at the time of a loss, next, a second prefetch designation command setting process is executed.
In the second look-ahead designation command setting process, when it is determined as “fixed value” by the prior random number type determination, the second mode for specifying the variation mode (variation mode number) determined by the prior variation mode determination at the time of defeat is designated. The prefetch designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, when it is determined as “indefinite value” by the prior random number type determination, the second prefetch designation command for designating “indefinite value” is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In the prior special figure variation mode determination process at the time of loss, if it is determined as “fixed value” by the prior random number type determination, the prior variation pattern determination at the time of loss is further executed.
On the other hand, in the prior special figure variation mode determination process at the time of loss, if it is determined as “indefinite value” by the prior random number type determination, the prior variation pattern determination at the time of loss is not executed.
In the prior variation pattern determination at the time of loss, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a loss pattern change pattern determination table in which correspondence between a change pattern random number and a change change pattern type (change pattern number) is registered.
Further, as the change pattern determination table at the time of loss, “change pattern determination table 1 at the time of loss” corresponding to “reach group 1”, “change pattern determination table 2 at time of loss” corresponding to “reach group 2”, and “reach” “Decision change variation pattern determination table 3” corresponding to “Group 3” is stored.
In addition, as the “decision change pattern determination table 1”, it corresponds to each combination of the number of holdings (the number of holdings of special figure 1 or the number of holdings of special figure 2) and the execution status (running or stopped) of the time reduction control. The “decision change pattern determination table 1” is stored.

In the “decision change variation pattern determination table 1”, only “variation without reach” is registered as the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) (“normal reach variation” and “super reach variation” are registered). Not)
In addition, the contents of the “decision change pattern determination table 1” corresponding to each number of holds are set so that the type of change pattern (change pattern number) associated with a shorter change time is selected as the number of holds increases. Yes.
Only “normal reach fluctuation” and “super reach fluctuation” and “super reach fluctuation” are not registered as the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) in the “decision fluctuation pattern determination table 2”. ).
Only “super reach variation” and “normal reach variation” are not registered as the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) in the “decision variation pattern determination table 3”. ). Note that “super reach 5” is not registered in the “decision change pattern determination table 3”.

As described above, the prior variation pattern determination at the time of loss selection is executed only when it is determined as “fixed value” by the prior random number type determination.
In the pre-change pattern determination at the time of loss, first, the type of reach group determined by the pre-reach group determination is confirmed, and a change pattern determination table at the time of loss corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the preliminary determination start information and the read variation pattern determination table at the time of winning.

In the special special figure variation mode determination process at the time of a loss, next, a third prefetch designation command setting process is executed.
In the third look-ahead designation command setting process, if it is determined as “fixed value” by the prior random number type determination, the third pattern designating the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) determined by the prior variation pattern determination at the time of defeat The prefetch designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, when it is determined as “indefinite value” by the prior random number type determination, the third prefetch designation command for designating “indefinite value” is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

As described above, when the value of the reach group random number included in the pre-determination start information is “fixed value”, the variation mode type (variation mode number) and the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) are determined, Second and third prefetch designation commands for designating the determined variation mode type and variation pattern type are transmitted to the effect control circuit 300.
On the other hand, if the value of the reach group random number included in the pre-determination start information is “undefined value”, the variation mode type (variation mode number) and the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) are not determined. , Second and third prefetch designation commands for designating “indefinite value” are transmitted to the effect control circuit 300.

Next, the special game management process in step S4-9 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the special game management process.
In the present embodiment, as a stage / stage (hereinafter referred to as “special game phase”) of a game (hereinafter referred to as “special game”) executed based on a special symbol lottery, `` Special figure changing state '', `` Special figure stop symbol display state '', `` Big prize opening before opening '', `` Big prize opening opening control state '', `` Large winning opening closed effective state '' and `` Large winning opening closed '' Seven "wait states" are defined.
In the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (special game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven special game phases is set.
The ROM 220 stores special game control modules corresponding to each special game phase as special game control modules (programs) for controlling (executing) special games.
In the special game management process, a special game control module corresponding to the value set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and a process based on the selected special game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the special game management process is executed in step S4-9, as shown in FIG. 15, first, the process proceeds to step S10-1.
In step S10-1, a special game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-2. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S10-2, a special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-3. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (special game phase) acquired in step S10-1 is read.
In step S10-3, a special game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10). In the special game control module execution process, a process based on the special game control module read in step S10-2 is started.
Specifically, when the value acquired in step S10-1 is a value corresponding to the “special figure change waiting state”, a special figure change waiting process described later is started, and the “special figure change waiting state” is started. In the case of a value corresponding to, a special figure changing process to be described later is started, and in the case of a value corresponding to "special figure stop symbol display state", a special figure stopping process to be described later is started, When the value corresponds to “a state before opening the big prize opening”, a pre-opening process for a special prize opening described later is started. When the value of the winning prize opening control process is started and the value corresponds to the “Large winning opening closed effective state”, the winning opening closing effective process described later is started, and the “Large winning opening open wait state” is entered. When the value is a corresponding value, a special winning opening opening end wait process described later is performed. It is started.

Next, the special figure variation waiting process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation waiting process.
When the special figure variation waiting process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 16, the process first proceeds to step S11-1.
In step S11-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is “1” or more, and when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is not “1” or more (No). Shifts to step S11-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is “1” or more (Yes), shifts to step S11-3.
In step S11-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter is “1” or more, and it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter is “1” or more (Yes). In step S11-3, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 holding number counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (Yes), the series of processing is terminated and the next processing (step S4-10) is performed. ).

In step S11-3, a special figure hold number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-4. In the special figure hold number update process, the special figure hold number (the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number) is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure hold number update process, first, the start information (special figure 1 start) stored in the start information storage area (the special figure 1 start information storage area and the special figure 2 start information storage area) of the RAM 230. Information and special figure 2 start information) is selected as determination start information.
In this embodiment, the start determination for the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area is given priority over the special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area. (Special figure winning judgment, special figure stop symbol judgment, special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, etc.) are executed.
Accordingly, when one or more special figure 2 start information is stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area, the first of the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area. Obtained (stored) is selected as the determination start information. That is, the special figure 2 start information stored in the first storage unit of the special figure 2 start information storage area is selected as the determination start information.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 start information is not stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area, the special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area is first acquired (stored). ) Is selected as the determination start information. That is, the special figure 1 start information stored in the first storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area is selected as the determination start information.
Next, the value of the special figure hold number counter (the special figure 1 hold number counter or the special figure 2 hold number counter) is updated.
Specifically, when the special figure 1 start information is set as the determination start information, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the special figure 1 hold number counter is newly added to the special figure 1 hold number. Set to counter.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 start information is determined start information, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the special figure 2 hold number counter is newly set in the special figure 2 hold number counter. To do.
Next, the determination start information storage area is changed (shifted) from the start information storage area (the special figure 1 start information storage area or the special figure 2 start information storage area) to the changing start information storage area.
Specifically, when the special figure 2 start information is determined start information, the special figure 2 start information (determination start information) stored in the first storage unit of the special figure 2 start information storage area is Store (shift) in the starting information storage area during fluctuation. Further, when the special figure 2 start information is stored in the second storage part to the fourth storage part of the special figure 2 start information storage area, the special figure 2 start information stored in each storage part is The data is stored (shifted) in the storage unit that has a higher priority than the storage unit.
On the other hand, when the special figure 1 start information is determined start information, the special figure 1 start information (determination start information) stored in the first storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area is used as the start during fluctuation. Store (shift) in the information storage area. In addition, when the special figure 1 start information is stored in the second storage part to the fourth storage part of the special figure 1 start information storage area, the special figure 1 start information stored in each storage part is The data is stored (shifted) in the storage unit that has a higher priority than the storage unit.

In step S11-4, a special figure winning determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-5. In the special symbol winning determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined (special symbol winning determination).
In the special figure winning determination process, the value set in the setting information storage area (setting value) and the current gaming state ("special figure high probability state" or "special figure low probability state") are confirmed. Then, the special drawing winning lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the determination start information and the read special symbol winning lottery table, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is “big hit” (special symbol winning determination).
Specifically, when the value of the jackpot random number included in the determination start information matches the jackpot value registered in the read special symbol winning lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is set to “big hit” ( It is determined that (winning).
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the judgment start information does not match the jackpot value registered in the read special figure winning lottery table (if it matches the outlier value), the special symbol lottery The result is determined as “out of” (decision).

In step S11-5, a special figure stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-6. In the special symbol stop symbol determination process, the special symbol stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is determined (special symbol stop symbol determination).
In the special symbol stop symbol determination process, if it is determined that the jackpot symbol (winning) is determined by the special symbol winning determination, the type (stop symbol number) of the big hit symbol is determined (special symbol stop symbol determination).
Specifically, when the starting information is special figure 1 starting information, the big winning symbol based on the winning symbol random number included in the determination starting information and the big bonus symbol lottery table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery Type (stop symbol number) is determined. On the other hand, if the determination start information is special figure 2 start information, the type of the big hit symbol based on the winning symbol random number included in the determination start information and the big bonus symbol lottery table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery (Stop symbol number) is determined.
On the other hand, in the special symbol stop symbol determination process, if it is determined as “out of” (decision) by the special symbol winning determination, the stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is set to “exclude symbol” (“out symbol”). The corresponding stop symbol number) is determined (special symbol stop symbol determination).
In the special symbol stop symbol determination process, next, the determined stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230.
In step S11-6, a symbol type designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-7. In the symbol type designation command setting process, the symbol type designation command for designating the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number) determined in step S11-5 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S11-7, special figure fluctuation pattern determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-8. In the special figure variation pattern determination process, the variation mode (variation mode type and variation pattern type) of the special symbol is determined.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process, it is determined whether or not “big hit” (winning) is determined by the special figure winning determination. Then, when it is determined that “big hit” (winning) is determined by the special figure winning determination, the special figure fluctuation mode determining process at the time of winning is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure winning determination is “out of” (decision), the special figure fluctuation state determination process at the time of loss is executed.

In the winning special figure variation mode determination process, first, the type of variation mode (variation mode number) is determined (variation mode determination at the time of winning).
In winning mode variation mode determination, the type of jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) determined by special symbol stop symbol determination, the gaming state ("special symbol high probability state" or "special symbol low probability state", the value of the hourly counter And the like, and the winning variation mode determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the determination start information and the read winning variation mode determination table, the variation mode type (variation mode number) is determined.
In the winning special figure variation mode determination process, next, the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) is determined (variation pattern determination at the time of winning).
In winning variation pattern determination, the type of jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) determined by special symbol stop symbol determination, gaming state ("special symbol high probability state" or "special symbol low probability state", value of the hourly counter Etc.) and the variation mode type (variation mode number) determined by the variation mode determination at the time of winning, and the winning variation pattern determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the determination start information and the read variation pattern determination table at the time of winning.

On the other hand, in the special figure change mode determination process at the time of loss, first, the type (“indefinite value” or “fixed value”) of the reach group random number included in the determination start information is determined (random number type determination).
In the random number type determination, if the value of the reach group random number included in the determination start information is less than “8500”, it is determined as “undefined value”, and the value of the reach group random number included in the determination start information is “8500”. When it is above, it is determined as “fixed value”.
In the special figure change mode determination process at the time of loss, next, the type of reach group (reach group number) is determined (reach group determination).
In the reach group determination, when it is determined as “fixed value” by the random number type determination, the fixed value reach group determination table is read. Then, the type of the reach group is determined based on the reach group random number included in the determination start information and the read fixed value reach group determination table.
On the other hand, when it is determined as “indefinite value” by the random number type determination, the indefinite value reach group determination table is read. Then, the type of reach group is determined based on the reach group random number included in the determination start information and the read indefinite value reach group determination table.
In the special figure change mode determination process at the time of loss, next, the type of change mode (change mode number) is determined (change mode determination at the time of loss).
In the loss mode change mode determination, when it is determined as “fixed value” by the random number type determination, the reach group type determined by the reach group determination is confirmed, and the loss mode change mode determination corresponding to the confirmation result Read the table. Then, the type (variation mode number) of the variation mode is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the determination start information and the read variation mode determination table at the time of loss.
On the other hand, when it is determined as “undefined value” by the random number type determination, the type of the reach group determined by the reach group determination, the number of holdings (the number of holdings in FIG. 1 or the number of holdings in FIG. 2), and time reduction control The execution state (during execution or stoppage) is confirmed, and the selection mode change mode determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, the type (variation mode number) of the variation mode is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the determination start information and the read variation mode determination table at the time of loss.
In the special figure change mode determination process at the time of loss, next, the type (change pattern number) of the change pattern is determined (change pattern determination at the time of loss).
In the change pattern determination at the time of loss selection, if it is determined as “fixed value” by the random number type determination, the type of reach group determined by the reach group determination is confirmed, and the fluctuation pattern determination at the time of loss corresponding to this confirmation result Read the table. Then, based on the variation pattern random number included in the determination start information and the read variation pattern determination table at the time of loss, the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) is determined.
On the other hand, when it is determined as “undefined value” by the random number type determination, the type of the reach group determined by the reach group determination, the number of holdings (the number of holdings in FIG. 1 or the number of holdings in FIG. 2), and time reduction control The execution state (during execution or stoppage) is confirmed, and the selection pattern variation pattern determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern random number included in the determination start information and the read-out fluctuation pattern determination table, the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) is determined.

In step S11-8, a variation pattern command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-9. In the variation pattern command setting process, a variation mode designation command for designating the variation mode type (variation mode number) determined in step S11-7 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, the variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) determined in step S11-7 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-9, a special figure variation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-10. In the special figure variation time setting process, the variation time (hereinafter referred to as “variation time 1”) corresponding to the variation mode type (variation mode number) determined in step S11-7 is acquired. Also, a variation time (hereinafter referred to as “variation time 2”) corresponding to the type (variation pattern number) of the variation pattern determined in step S11-7 is acquired. Then, the total time of the obtained fluctuation time 1 and fluctuation time 2 is calculated. Then, the calculated total time is set in the special game timer.

In step S11-10, special figure fluctuation display data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-11. In the special figure fluctuation display data setting process, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the special figure display devices 61 and 62 is set.
Specifically, in the special figure variation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the special figure display timer.
Next, when the determination start information is the special figure 1 start information, a predetermined initial value is set in the special figure display symbol counter corresponding to the special figure 1 display device 61. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device 61, the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure display symbol counter is controlled to be lit.
On the other hand, when the determination start information is the special figure 2 start information, a predetermined initial value is set in the special figure display symbol counter corresponding to the special figure 2 display device 62. Thereby, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device 62, the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure display symbol counter is controlled to be lit.

In step S11-11, a hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-12. In the number-of-holds designation command setting process, a number-of-holds designation command that designates that the number of special figure holds (number of special figure 1 hold or number of special figure 2 hold) has decreased by “1” is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. To do. At this time, if the judgment start information is the special figure 1 start information, the pending number designation command for designating that the special figure 1 pending number has decreased by "1" is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230, If the judgment start information is the special figure 2 start information, a hold number designation command for designating that the special figure 2 hold number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S11-12, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “special figure changing state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the special figure changing process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the special figure changing process.
When the special figure changing process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 17, first, the process proceeds to step S12-1.
In step S12-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S12-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-4.
In step S12-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure display timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is "0" (Yes), step S12- 3. If it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10).
In step S12-3, a special figure fluctuation display data update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10). In the special figure fluctuation display data update processing, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the special figure display devices 61 and 62 is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure change display data update process, a value obtained by adding “1” to the value of the special figure display symbol counter is newly set in the special figure display symbol counter.

In step S12-4, a special figure stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-5. In the special figure stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the special figure display devices 61 and 62 is set.
Specifically, in the special symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol type (stop symbol number) stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, when the variable display of the first special symbol is terminated, a value corresponding to the acquired stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is set in the special symbol display symbol counter corresponding to the special symbol 1 display device 61. To do. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device 61, the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure display symbol counter is controlled to light (stop display).
On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special symbol is terminated, a value corresponding to the acquired stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is set in the special symbol display symbol counter corresponding to the special symbol 2 display device 62. . Thereby, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device 62, the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure display symbol counter is controlled to be lit (stop display).
In step S12-5, a special figure stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-6. In the special figure stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the special game timer.
In step S12-6, a stop designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-7. In the stop specification command setting process, the stop specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S12-7, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “special figure stop symbol display state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the special figure stopping process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special figure stopping process.
When the special figure stopping process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 18, first, the process proceeds to step S13-1.
In step S13-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10).
In step S13-2, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol is “hit symbol” (stop symbol number corresponding to “hit symbol”), and when it is determined that the stop symbol is not “hit symbol” (No). Moves to step S13-3, and if it is determined that the stop symbol is a “hit symbol” (Yes), the procedure moves to step S13-6.
In step S13-3, it is determined whether or not the time reduction control is being executed. If it is determined that the time reduction control is being executed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-4 and the time reduction control is being executed. If not (No), the process proceeds to step S13-5.
Here, if “1” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined that the time reduction control is being executed, and if “0” is set, execution of the time reduction control is executed. Judge that it is not in.

In step S13-4, a time reduction control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-5. In the time reduction control management process, it is determined whether or not the time reduction control is terminated.
Specifically, in the time reduction control management process, first, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value of the time reduction counter is newly set as the value of the time reduction counter.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (Yes), “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230 (time reduction control is stopped). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter is not “0”, a state where “1” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230 is maintained (a state where the time reduction control is being executed is maintained). .
In step S13-5, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “special figure change waiting state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-6, a game state update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-7. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, “0” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area of the RAM 230. Also, “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S13-7, a special power control data setting process is executed and the process proceeds to step S13-8. In the special electric combination control data setting process, control data for opening and closing the special electric combination 53a is set.
The ROM 220 stores special electric role control tables corresponding to each type of “big hit symbol” (each stop symbol number). Each special power control table includes a special winning opening closing effective time, a special winning opening closing time, the number of round games, the number of opening / closing switching corresponding to each round game, and control data (solenoid) corresponding to each opening / closing switching. Control data, control time data) and the like.
In the special power control data setting process, the special power control table corresponding to the “hit symbol” (stop symbol number) determined in step S11-5 is read, and the read special power control table is read as the special power control table in the RAM 230. Set in the role control table area.
Next, “0” is set in the special electric utility continuous operation number counter.

In step S13-8, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-9. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer with reference to the special power control table set in the special power control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-9, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-10. In the opening designation command setting process, the opening designation command for designating the “hit symbol” (stop symbol number) determined in step S11-5 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S13-10, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “pre-big prize opening state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the big winning opening opening pre-processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the special winning opening.
When the big prize opening pre-processing is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 19, first, the process proceeds to step S14-1.
In step S14-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S14-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10).
In step S14-2, a special electric combination continuous operation number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-3. In the special electric power continuous operation frequency counter update process, a value obtained by adding “1” to the value set in the special electric power continuous operation frequency counter is newly set in the special electric power continuous operation frequency counter.
In step S14-3, a round start designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-4. In the round start designation command setting process, the round start designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S14-4, a special electric utility opening / closing switching frequency setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-5. In the special power combination opening / closing switching number setting process, the special power combination control table set in the special power combination control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to and the opening / closing switching number corresponding to the value of the special power combination continuous operation number counter is read. . Then, the read opening / closing switching frequency is set in the special electric utility switching frequency counter.
Next, “0” is set as the value of the special electric winning prize counter.
In step S14-5, a special power combination opening / closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-6. The special electric role opening / closing switching process will be described later.
In step S14-6, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “big winning opening release control state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the special power combination opening / closing switching process of steps S14-5 and S16-3 will be described.
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the special power combination opening / closing switching process.
When the special power combination opening / closing switching process is executed in steps S14-5 and S16-3, as shown in FIG. 20, first, the process proceeds to step S15-1.
In step S15-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special power utility switching frequency counter is “0”, and when it is determined that the value of the special power service switching frequency counter is not “0” (No). Moves to step S15-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric power switch on / off switching counter is “0” (Yes), the series of processing ends and the next processing (step S14-6) Alternatively, the process proceeds to S16-4).
In step S15-2, a special power combination control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-3. In the special electric combination control data setting process, control data for controlling the special electric combination 53a to the open state or the closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special power control data setting process, a special power control table set in the special power control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the solenoid corresponding to the value of the special power on / off switching counter Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data designating energization or deenergization) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. Thereby, the control of the special winning opening solenoid 65 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the special electric accessory 53a is controlled to be in an open state or a closed state.

In step S15-3, a special power control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-4. In the special power control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S15-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special power combination control time setting process, the special power role control table set in the special power role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the control corresponding to the value of the special power role opening / closing switching frequency counter is referred to. Read time. Then, the read control time is set in the special game timer.
In step S15-4, a special power combination opening / closing switching number counter update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S14-6 or S16-4). In the special electric utility switching frequency counter updating process, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the special electric power switching frequency counter is newly set in the special electric power switching frequency counter.

Next, the special winning opening opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening control process.
When the big prize opening opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 21, first, the process proceeds to step S16-1.
In step S16-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special power combination switching frequency counter is “0”, and when it is determined that the value of the special power switching frequency counter is not “0” (No). The process proceeds to step S16-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric power switching on / off counter is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5.
In step S16-3, a special power combination opening / closing switching process (see FIG. 20) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the special power prize winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (10 [ball] in the present embodiment). If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning prize counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No). Terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-10).

In step S16-5, a special winning opening opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-6. In the special winning opening opening control end process, solenoid control data for designating the energization stop is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the special electric accessory 53a is controlled to be closed.
In step S16-6, a special winning opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-7. In the special winning opening closing time setting process, the special winning combination closing effective time (interval time) is obtained by referring to the special electronic control table set in the special electric control table area of the RAM 230, and the special game timer. Set to.
In step S16-7, a round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-8. In the round end designation command setting process, the round end designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S16-8, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “big winning opening closed effective state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the special winning opening closing effective process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening closing effective process.
When the big prize opening closing effective process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 22, first, the process proceeds to step S17-1.
In step S17-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10).
In step S17-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special power combination continuous operation number counter has reached a specified value, and when it is determined that the value of the special power combination continuous operation number counter has not reached the specified value (No ), The process proceeds to step S17-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric power continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-5.
Here, referring to the special power combination control table set in the special power role control table area of the RAM 230, the number of round games defined in the special power role control table is acquired as a specified value to make a determination. .
In step S17-3, a special winning opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-4. In the special winning opening closing time setting process, a special winning combination closing time is set in the special game timer with reference to the special electric control table set in the special electric control control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-4, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “pre-big prize opening state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S17-5, an ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-6. In the ending time setting process, a special ending time is set in the special game timer with reference to a special power control table set in the special power control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-6, an ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-7. In the ending designation command setting process, the ending designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-7, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “big winning opening free wait state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the special winning opening free weighting process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening free weighting process.
When the big prize opening opening end weight process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 23, first, the process proceeds to step S18-1.
In step S18-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S18-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10).
In step S18-2, a game state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S18-3. In the game state setting process, the game state is set.
Specifically, in the game state setting process, the value of the special figure high probability state flag in the RAM 230 is set according to the type of the stop symbol (big hit symbol). At this time, when the type of the stop symbol is “one jackpot symbol”, “six jackpot symbol” or “8 jackpot symbol” to “10 jackpot symbol”, “1” is set in the special symbol high probability state flag area of the RAM 230. Set. On the other hand, when the stop symbol type is “2 jackpots” to “5 jackpots” or “7 jackpots”, “0” is set in the special symbol high probability state flag area of the RAM 230.
Next, a predetermined time reduction count (70 [times] in this embodiment) is set in the time reduction counter. Also, “1” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230.
Next, a value corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol is set in the previous jackpot symbol flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S18-3, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “special figure change waiting state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the normal game management process in step S4-10 will be described.
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the normal game management process.
Here, in this embodiment, as the stage / stage (hereinafter referred to as “normal game phase”) of the game (hereinafter referred to as “normal game phase”) executed based on the normal symbol lottery, `` Status '', `` Normal diagram changing status '', `` Normal diagram stop symbol display status '', `` Multi-plan electric accessory release state '', `` Multi-plan electric feature release control status '', `` Multi-plan electric feature closure enabled Seven states are defined: “state” and “usually waiting state for opening the electric accessory release”.
Then, a value (ordinary game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven normal game phases is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
The ROM 220 stores a normal game control module corresponding to each normal game phase as a normal game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the normal game.
In the normal game management process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and the process based on the selected normal game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the normal game management process is executed in step S4-10, the process first proceeds to step S19-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S19-1, a normal game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-2. In the normal game phase acquisition process, the value (normal game phase) set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S19-2, a normal game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-3. In the normal game control module acquisition process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value acquired in step S19-1 (normal game phase) is read.
In step S19-3, a normal game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game control module execution process, a process based on the normal game control module read in step S19-2 is started.
Specifically, when the value acquired in step S19-1 is a value corresponding to the “waiting state for normal map change”, a process for waiting for a normal map change to be described later is started, and the “current state for normal map change” is started. In the case of a value corresponding to, the process of changing the normal map described later is started, and in the case of the value corresponding to the "general map stop symbol display state", the process of stopping the normal map described later is started, When it is a value corresponding to “a state before opening an ordinary electric accessory”, a normal electric accessory opening pre-processing described later is started, and when it is a value corresponding to “an ordinary electric accessory opening control state”. When the normal electric actor release control process described later is started and the value corresponds to the “normal electric actor closing effective state”, the normal electric actor closing effective process described later is started, If the value corresponds to the `` object release end wait state '', Electric won game open end wait process is started.

Next, the process of waiting for a change in the normal map executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the normal variation waiting process.
When the normal variation waiting process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 25, first, the process proceeds to step S20-1.
In step S20-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the pending map counter is “1” or more, and when it is determined that the value of the pending map counter is “1” or more (Yes). , The process proceeds to step S20-2, and if it is determined that the value of the general-purpose hold number counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11) To do.
In step S20-2, a general-purpose hold number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-3. In the general figure hold number update process, the general figure hold number is updated.
Specifically, in the normal figure reservation number update process, one start information among the general figure start information stored in the normal start information storage area of the RAM 230 is selected as determination start information.
In the present embodiment, the universal chart start information acquired (stored) first among the general chart start information stored in the universal chart start information storage area is selected as the determination start information.

In step S20-3, a normal winning determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-4. In the normal figure winning determination process, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined (normal figure winning determination).
The ROM 220 stores a common symbol winning lottery table in which the winning symbol of the normal symbol lottery is registered. In addition, as a common figure winning lottery table, a common figure winning lottery table corresponding to the execution of the time reduction control and a common figure winning lottery table corresponding to the stoppage of the time reduction control are stored.
In the common-place winning lottery table corresponding to the stoppage of the short-time control, the winning value is registered so that the winning probability is the first probability (1/99 in this embodiment). On the other hand, the win value is registered so that the winning probability is a second probability (1/1 in the present embodiment) higher than the first probability in the common figure winning lottery table corresponding to the execution of the short-time control. ing.
Then, in the normal figure winning determination process, the normal figure winning lottery table is determined based on the winning random number included in the determination start information and the normal figure winning lottery table corresponding to the current execution status (execution or stoppage). Make a decision.
Specifically, when the value of the winning random number included in the determination start information matches the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined as “winning” (winning).
On the other hand, if the value of the winning random number included in the determination start information does not match the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined to be “out” (losing).

In step S20-4, a common figure stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-5. In the general symbol stop symbol determination process, the type (stop symbol number) of the normal symbol stop symbol is determined (normal symbol stop symbol determination).
Specifically, in the general symbol stop symbol determination process, if it is determined to be “winning” (winning) by the common symbol winning determination, “stop per symbol” is set as the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number). judge.
On the other hand, if it is determined as “out of” (decision) by the normal symbol winning determination, “out of symbol” is determined as the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number).
Next, the determined stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230.
In step S20-5, a normal fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-6. In the normal pattern variation pattern determination process, the type (variation pattern number) of the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined (normal pattern variation pattern determination).
Specifically, in the normal map variation pattern determination process, when the time reduction control is stopped, the first type (2.0 in the present embodiment) is set as the type of the general map variation pattern (variation pattern number). The type corresponding to the variation time of [s] is determined.
On the other hand, when the time-shortening control is being executed, the second type (in this embodiment, the type corresponding to the fluctuation time of 0.5 [s]) is used as the type of the normal fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number). Determine.

In step S20-6, a normal time change time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-7. In the usual figure fluctuation time setting process, the fluctuation time corresponding to the type of the usual figure fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) determined in step S20-6 is acquired. And the acquired fluctuation | variation time is set to a normal game timer.
In step S20-7, a map change display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-8. In the general map display data setting process, data for controlling the variable display of the general map display device 60 is set.
Specifically, in the normal map display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the general map display timer.
Next, a predetermined initial value is set in the general symbol display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the general-purpose display device 60, the segment corresponding to the value of the general-purpose display symbol counter is controlled to be lit.
In step S20-8, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “normal state changing state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the process during normal map change executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the process during normal map change.
When the normal map change process is executed in step S19-3, the process first proceeds to step S21-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S21-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S21-2. When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-4.
In step S21-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the common map display timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the general map display timer is “0” (Yes), step S21− If it is determined that the value of the normal display timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11).
In step S21-3, a normal map display data update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the general map display data update process, data for controlling the variable display of the general map display device 60 is updated.
More specifically, in the normal map display data update process, a value obtained by adding “1” to the value of the general map display symbol counter is newly set in the general symbol display symbol counter.

In step S21-4, a normal stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-5. In the general map stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the general map display device 60 is set.
Specifically, in the general symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol type (stop symbol number) stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, a value corresponding to the acquired stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is set in the general symbol display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the general-purpose display device 60, the segment corresponding to the value of the general-purpose display symbol counter is controlled to be lit (stop display).
In step S21-5, a normal stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-6. In the usual stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S21-6, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “normal game stop symbol display state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the routine stoppage process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing processing during a normal stoppage.
When the normal map stop process is executed in step S19-3, the process first proceeds to step S22-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S22-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is “0”, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11).
In step S22-2, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol is “per symbol”. If it is determined that the stop symbol is not “per symbol” (No), the process proceeds to step S22-3. If it is determined that the stop symbol is “per symbol” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-4.
In step S22-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “normal state waiting state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S22-4, normal electric control data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-5. In the ordinary electric combination control data setting process, control data for opening and closing the ordinary electric combination 52a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a normal power control table corresponding to the execution status (during execution or stoppage) of the time reduction control. Each normal power control table includes a time before opening a normal power, a normal power close effective time, an open end wait time, the number of opening / closing switching, and control data corresponding to each opening / closing switching (solenoid control data, control time). Data).
In the normal power combination control data setting process, the normal power role control table corresponding to the execution status (execution or stoppage) of the short time control is read, and the read normal power role control table is read in the normal power role control table area of the RAM 230. Set.
Next, the number of times of opening / closing switching is read with reference to the normal power control table set in the normal power control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the read opening / closing switching frequency is set in the normal electric utility switching frequency counter. Also, “0” is set as the value of the ordinary electric winning prize counter.

In step S22-5, a normal electric utility opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. In the normal power combination opening time setting process, a predetermined normal power combination release time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal power control table set in the normal power control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S22-6, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “state before the normal electric game object is released” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the normal electric accessory opening pre-processing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the process for releasing the ordinary electric accessory.
When the normal electric accessory release pre-processing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 28, first, the process proceeds to step S23-1.
In step S23-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S23-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11).
In step S23-2, a normal power combination opening / closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S23-3. The normal power combination opening / closing switching process will be described later.
In step S23-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “ordinary electric accessory release control state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the normal electric combination opening / closing switching process in steps S23-2 and S25-3 will be described.
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the normal power combination opening / closing switching process.
When the ordinary power combination opening / closing switching process is executed in steps S23-2 and S25-3, the process first proceeds to step S24-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S24-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter is “0”, and when it is determined that the value of the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter is not “0” (No). Shifts to step S24-2, and when it is determined that the value of the normal electric utility opening / closing switching number counter is “0” (Yes), the series of processing is terminated and the next processing (step S23-3) is performed. Alternatively, the process proceeds to S25-4).
In step S24-2, an ordinary electronic combination control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-3. In the ordinary electric combination control data setting process, control data for controlling the ordinary electric combination 52a to an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the normal power combination control data setting process, a solenoid corresponding to the value of the normal power combination open / close switching number counter is referred to by referring to the normal power combination control table set in the normal power combination control table area of the RAM 230. Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data designating energization or deenergization) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, control of the start opening solenoid 64 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the ordinary electric accessory 52a is controlled to be in an open state or a closed state.

In step S24-3, a normal power combination control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. In the normal electric control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S24-2 is set.
Specifically, in the normal power combination control time setting process, the control corresponding to the value of the normal power combination open / close switching counter is referred to by referring to the normal power control table set in the normal power control table area of the RAM 230. Read time. Then, the read control time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S24-4, the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S23-3 or S25-4). In the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter is newly set in the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter.

Next, the ordinary electric accessory release control process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the ordinary electric accessory release control process.
When the normal electric accessory release control process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 30, first, the process proceeds to step S25-1.
In step S25-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter is “0”, and when it is determined that the value of the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter is not “0” (No). The process proceeds to step S25-3, and if it is determined that the value of the ordinary power combination switching number counter is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5.
In step S25-3, a normal power combination opening / closing switching process (see FIG. 29) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary electronic winning prize counter has reached a predetermined upper limit (3 [ball] in the present embodiment), and the value of the ordinary electric winning prize counter is predetermined. If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5, and if it is determined that the value of the ordinary electronic winning prize counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No). Terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-11).

In step S25-5, a normal electric utility release control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-6. In the normal power combination release control end process, solenoid control data for designating the energization stop is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the ordinary electric accessory 52a is controlled to be closed.
In step S25-6, normal electric utility closing effective time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-7. In the normal power combination closing valid time setting process, a normal power combination closing effective time is set in the normal game timer by referring to the normal power combination control table set in the normal power combination control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S25-7, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “normal electric accessory closing valid state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the normal electric accessory closing effective process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory closing effective process.
When the normal electric accessory closing effective process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 31, first, the process proceeds to step S26-1.
In step S26-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S26-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11).
In step S26-2, an opening end wait time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26-3. In the opening end wait time setting process, a predetermined opening end waiting time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal power combination control table set in the normal power combination control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S26-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “ordinary electric accessory release end wait state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the ordinary electric accessory opening end weight process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the ordinary electric accessory release end weight process.
When the ordinary electric accessory release end weight process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 32, first, the process proceeds to step S27-1.
In step S27-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S27-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11).
In step S27-2, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “normal state waiting state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the base ratio calculation process in step S4-17 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the base ratio calculation process.
When the base ratio calculation process is executed in step S4-17, the process proceeds to step S28-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S28-1, it is determined whether or not the game state is predetermined, and if it is determined that the game state is predetermined (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-2 and is determined not to be the predetermined game state. If it has been (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-18).
In the present embodiment, when the “special figure low probability state” is occurring and the time-shortening control is stopped, it is determined that the game state is the predetermined game state. On the other hand, if at least one of the “special figure high probability state” is being generated and the short-time control is being executed, it is determined that the game state is not the predetermined game state.

In step S28-2, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the out ball detection sensor 109 is detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the out ball detection sensor 109 is detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-3. If it is determined that the ON state of the out ball detection sensor 109 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S28-4.
Here, when “1” is set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the out-sphere detection sensor 109, it is determined that the on-state of the out-sphere detection sensor 109 is detected, and the out-sphere detection sensor If “0” is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the 109 detection signal, it is determined that the ON state of the out ball detection sensor 109 is not detected.
In step S28-3, an out-ball number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-4. In the out ball counter updating process, “1” is added to the value of the out ball counter.

In step S28-4, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the other winning ball detection sensors 105 to 108 is detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the other winning ball detection sensors 105 to 108 is detected (Yes). When the process proceeds to step S28-5 and it is determined that the on-state of the other winning ball detection sensors 105 to 108 is not detected (No), the process proceeds to step S28-6.
Here, when “1” is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signals of the other winning ball detection sensors 105 to 108, it is determined that the ON state of the other winning ball detection sensors 105 to 108 has been detected. If “0” is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signals of the other winning ball detection sensors 105 to 108, the ON state of the other winning ball detection sensors 105 to 108 is not detected. judge.
In step S28-5, a payout number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-6. In the payout counter updating process, “10”, which is the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the game balls entering the other winning ports 54 to 57, is added to the value of the payout counter.

In step S28-6, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 is detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 is detected (Yes), If the process proceeds to step S28-7 and it is determined that the on state of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 is not detected (No), the process proceeds to step S28-8.
Here, when “1” is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the special figure 1 start ball detection sensor 101, it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start ball detection sensor 101 has been detected. If “0” is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101, the ON state of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 is not detected. judge.
In step S28-7, a payout counter updating process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-8. In the payout number counter update process, “3”, which is the number of prize balls to be paid out in accordance with the game ball entering the first start port 51, is added to the value of the payout number counter.

In step S28-8, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 has been detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 has been detected (Yes), If the process proceeds to step S28-9 and it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 is not detected (No), the process proceeds to step S28-10.
Here, if “1” is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102, it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 has been detected. If “0” is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102, the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 is not detected. judge.
In step S28-9, a payout counter updating process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-10. In the payout number counter update process, “1”, which is the number of prize balls to be paid out in accordance with the game ball entering the second start port 52, is added to the value of the payout number counter.

In step S28-10, it is determined whether or not the value of the out ball counter has reached the reference value. If it is determined that the value of the out ball counter has reached the reference value (Yes), step S28 is performed. When the process proceeds to -11 and it is determined that the value of the out ball counter does not reach the reference value (No), the process proceeds to step S28-13.
In this embodiment, the reference value = 60000 × n (n = integer). “N” is a value indicating the current section, and “1” is set as an initial value.
In step S28-11, a base ratio storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-12. In the base ratio storage process, the base ratio calculated in the previous base ratio calculation process (step S28-13) is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 as the final base ratio of the previous section. Also, the value of the payout counter is reset (“0” is set as the payout counter value).
In step S28-12, a reference value update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-13. In the reference value update process, “1” is added to the value (n) indicating the current section. Thereby, the reference value is updated.

In step S28-13, a base ratio calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-14. In the base ratio calculation process, the base ratio is calculated based on the value of the out ball counter and the value of the payout counter.
In step S28-14, a base ratio display update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-18).
In the base ratio display update process, the performance display device 67 sets display control data for displaying the base ratio. At this time, in the performance display device 67, the base ratio calculated at step S28-13 (the current base ratio of the current section) and the base ratio stored at step S28-11 (the final base of the previous section). Display control data corresponding to the current base ratio of the current section, and display control data corresponding to the final base ratio of the previous section, so that the ratio is alternately displayed at predetermined intervals. Are alternately set at predetermined time intervals.

(Various effects executed in the pachinko machine 1)
Next, various effects performed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
First, a hold effect (hold display) executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, each start information (the special figure 1 start information or the special figure 2 start information) stored in the start information storage area (the special figure 1 start information storage area and the special figure 2 start information storage area) is targeted. The hold effect is executed.
The holding effect is that a special symbol notification display (starting determination) based on start information (hereinafter referred to as “holding effect target start information”) that is a target of the holding effect is held, or a holding effect. It is an effect that suggests (notifies) that a special symbol notification display based on the target start information is being executed.
In the hold effect, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed in the hold symbol display areas b1 to b3.

Specifically, in the reserved symbol display area b2, as the display position (display unit) where the reserved symbol h is displayed, four storage units (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) of the special figure 1 start information storage region ) Is specified for each display position.
In the reserved symbol display area b3, each of the four storage units (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) of the special figure 2 start information storage region is used as a display position (display unit) where the reserved symbol h is displayed. The display position corresponding to is defined.
And in the hold effect which uses the special figure 1 start information as the target hold effect target start information, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed in the hold symbol display areas b1 and b2.
That is, during the period in which the hold production target start information is stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area (the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit) (after the acquisition of the hold production target start information, During the period before the start determination based on), the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed in the hold symbol display area b2.
At this time, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage unit (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) in which the hold effect target start information is stored.
On the other hand, during the period when the hold production target start information is stored in the changing start information storage area (after the start determination based on the hold production target start information is executed, the special symbol notification display based on the hold production target start information ends. In the period up to), the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed in the hold symbol display area b1.
On the other hand, in the hold effect using the special figure 2 start information as the hold effect target start information, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed in the hold symbol display areas b1 and b3.
That is, during the period in which the hold production target start information is stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area (the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit) (after acquisition of the hold production target start information, During the period before the start determination based on), the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed in the hold symbol display area b3.
At this time, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage unit (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) in which the hold effect target start information is stored.
On the other hand, during the period when the hold production target start information is stored in the changing start information storage area (after the start determination based on the hold production target start information is executed, the special symbol notification display based on the hold production target start information ends. In the period up to), the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed in the hold symbol display area b1.

For example, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored as special figure 1 start information in the third storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area, and a holding effect for the special figure 1 start information is provided. When executed, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed at the display position corresponding to the third storage unit in the hold symbol display area b2 in response to the start of the hold effect.
Thereafter, the display area of the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information in response to the storage area storing the hold effect target start information being changed (shifted) from the third storage unit to the second storage unit. However, the display position corresponding to the third storage unit is changed (shifted) to the display position corresponding to the second storage unit.
In addition, when the storage area for storing the hold effect target start information is changed (shifted) from the second storage unit to the first storage unit, the display area of the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information However, the display position corresponding to the second storage unit is changed (shifted) to the display position corresponding to the first storage unit.
Further, the storage area for storing the hold production target start information is changed (shifted) from the special figure 1 start information storage area (first storage unit) to the changing start information storage area. The display area of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the start information is changed (shifted) from the reserved symbol display area b2 (display position corresponding to the first storage unit) to the reserved symbol display area b1.
Then, in response to the end of the special symbol notification display based on the hold effect target start information, the display of the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information in the hold symbol display area b1 is ended, whereby the hold effect ends. To do.

In the present embodiment, a normal hold effect and a hold notice effect are defined as the types of hold effects.
“Normal hold effect” is a type of hold effect that does not suggest the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8) based on the hold effect target start information.
In the present embodiment, “white”, “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “gold” are defined as colors (types) of the reserved symbol h.
In the normal hold effect, a “white” hold symbol h is displayed as the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information. In the normal holding effect, the color of the holding symbol h corresponding to the holding effect target start information remains “white” and does not change.
In the normal hold effect, the hold effect target start information (Special Figure 1 start information or Special Figure 2 start information) is stored in the start information storage area (Special Figure 1 start information storage area or Special Figure 2 start information storage area). Is started in response to the end of the notification display of the special symbol based on the hold production target start information.

The “holding notice effect” is a kind of prefetch notice effect described later. That is, the hold notice effect is a type of hold effect that suggests the result of prior determination (step S9-8) based on the hold effect target start information (start information corresponding to the prefetch target hold information).
In the present embodiment, the hold notice effect is an effect that suggests the result of the prior special symbol stop symbol determination based on the hold effect target start information (specifically, the possibility of being a “hit symbol”).
It should be noted that the hold notice effect may be configured to suggest a result of the prior special figure fluctuation pattern determination based on the hold effect target start information (specifically, there is a possibility of “super reach fluctuation”).
In the following description, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information that is the target of the hold notice effect is referred to as “notice target hold symbol hy”.
In the hold notice effect, the color of the notice target hold symbol hy changes. That is, in the hold notice effect, the color of the notice target hold symbol hy changes to one of “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “gold”. In the hold notice effect, the color of the notice object hold symbol hy that finally changes suggests the degree of expectation that the big hit gaming state will occur based on the hold effect object start information.
Here, the expected degree of each color of the reserved symbol h (preliminary subject reserved symbol hy) is “golden”, “red”, “green”, “blue”, “white” (expected degree) in descending order of the expected degree. High → low expectation).
That is, each color of the reserved symbol h (preliminary subject reserved symbol hy) is previously graded (ranked) based on the expectation. At this time, the stage (order) of each color of the reserved symbol h is “gold” (fifth stage), “red” (fourth stage), “green” (third stage) in order from the highest stage (rank). ), “Blue” (second stage), and “white” (first stage) (step high → step low).
The “expected degree” refers to the possibility (degree) of occurrence of a big hit gaming state when the color is selected as the final color of the reserved symbol h (preliminary subject reserved symbol hy).

Further, when the hold notice effect is executed, one or more hold change triggers and hold change contents corresponding to each hold change trigger are set. In the hold notice effect, the color of the notice target hold symbol hy changes according to the hold change content corresponding to the hold change trigger in accordance with the arrival of each hold change trigger.
The “holding change opportunity” is an opportunity for the color of the notice target holding symbol hy to change. Further, the “holding change content” is a content in which the color of the notice target holding symbol hy changes.
In the present embodiment, as a hold change trigger, when prefetch target hold information (hold effect production start information) is acquired (at the time of storage), when a variation production related to advance hold information described later is started, prefetch target hold information (hold production target) Start information), at the start of each pseudo-change effect included in the change effect related to the pre-read target hold information (particularly at the start of the first pseudo-change effect), changes related to the pre-read target hold information The end time of each pseudo variation effect included in the effect (in particular, the end of the second pseudo variation effect) is defined. When the hold notice effect is executed, one or more hold change triggers are set from these hold change triggers.
Specifically, when the type of the fluctuation mode indicated by the prefetch target hold information (holding production target start information) is a type belonging to “pseudo-continuous fluctuation”, the prefetch target hold information is acquired (stored) , At the start of the fluctuating effect related to the preceding hold information (when a plurality of preceding hold information is stored, at the start of the fluctuating effect related to each preceding hold information), and to start the fluctuating effect related to the prefetch target hold information One or more pending change triggers are set from among the times.
On the other hand, when the type of the variation mode indicated by the prefetch target hold information (holding production target start information) is “pseudo continuous 2 change”, “pseudo continuous 3 change”, or “pseudo continuous 4 change”, the prefetch target hold information At the time of storage (at the time of storage), at the start of the variation effect related to the advance hold information (when a plurality of advance hold information is stored, at the start of the change effect related to each advance hold information), At the start of the fluctuating effect related to the hold information, at the start of each fluctuating variable effect included in the fluctuating effect related to the prefetch target hold information, and to end each pseudo variable effect included in the fluctuating effect related to the prefetch target hold information One or more pending change triggers are set from among the times.
In this embodiment, the hold notice effect is executed only for the special figure 1 start information among the special figure 1 start information and the special figure 2 start information.
The hold notice effect is started before the change effect related to the prefetch target hold information (starting information corresponding to the prefetch target hold information) is started. Specifically, the hold notice effect is started in response to the start of display of the notice subject hold symbol hy (storage of the hold effect subject start information), and the variable effect based on the start information corresponding to the notice subject hold symbol hy is displayed. It is ended according to the end.

Next, the fluctuating effects executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, the first variation effect and the second variation effect are continuously executed as the variation effects while the special symbol variation display is being performed.
In the present embodiment, modes corresponding to various types of variation modes (variation mode numbers) are defined as the first variation rendering mode (variation rendering number). In addition, as modes of the second variation effect (variation effect numbers), modes corresponding to various types of variation patterns (each variation pattern number) are defined.
The first variation effect corresponding to each aspect (each variation effect number) includes a display effect, a sound effect, and a lamp effect. Further, the second variation effect corresponding to each aspect (each variation effect number) includes a display effect, a sound effect, and a lamp effect.
In the following description, the first effect symbol z1 displayed in the first effect symbol display area a1 is “left symbol”, and the first effect symbol z1 displayed in the first effect symbol display area a2 is “middle symbol”. The first effect symbol z1 displayed in the first effect symbol display area a3 is referred to as a “right symbol”.

First, the aspect of the first variation effect corresponding to each variation mode will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, when “pseudo continuous variation” (“pseudo continuous 2 variation”, “pseudo continuous 3 variation” or “pseudo continuous 4 variation”) is selected (designated) as the type of variation mode, the first variation A “pseudo continuous variation effect” is selected as the effect.
In the present embodiment, as a pseudo continuous variation effect mode (variation effect number), “pseudo continuous 2 variation effect” corresponding to “pseudo continuous 2 variation” and “pseudo continuous 3 variation” corresponding to “pseudo continuous 3 variation”. An “effect” and a “pseudo-continuous 4 variation effect” corresponding to “pseudo-continuous 4 variation” are defined.
The “pseudo continuous variation effect” is configured to include a display effect in which the change display of the first effect symbol z1 is executed a plurality of times in a pseudo manner during the execution of one special symbol change display. Specifically, the pseudo continuous variation effect includes a plurality of pseudo variation effects.
In the present embodiment, the “pseudo-continuous two-change effect” is configured to include two pseudo-change effects. On the other hand, the “pseudo-continuous three-variation effect” is configured to include three pseudo-variation effects. On the other hand, the “pseudo-continuous four-change effect” is configured to include four pseudo-change effects.
In the following description, among the pseudo variation effects included in the pseudo continuous variation effect, the last pseudo variation effect is referred to as a “last pseudo variation effect”. In addition, among the pseudo variation effects included in the pseudo continuous variation effect, each time pseudo variation effect excluding the last round pseudo variation effect is referred to as “halfway pseudo variation effect”.

Each of the pseudo-variation effects (half-time pseudo-variation effect and final pseudo-variation effect) includes a normal variation effect, a normal reach variation effect, and a pseudo-continuous effect as display effects.
“Normal variation effect” refers to a display effect in which the first effect symbol z1 is normally varied and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. Specifically, in the normal variation effect, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are normally displayed in a variable manner.
“Normal variation display” refers to a display in which the types of the first effect symbols z1 displayed at the lottery result display positions in the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 are sequentially switched.
The “lottery result display position” refers to a position where the first effect symbol z1 is stopped and displayed in a stop effect to be described later.
In the “normal reach fluctuation effect”, the first effect symbol z1 is temporarily stopped and displayed in two or more areas among the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, and is temporarily stopped and displayed in two or more areas. A combination of the first effect symbols z1 is a display effect that is a combination included in the “big hit symbol”.
In the following description, in the normal reach fluctuation effect (or reduced reach fluctuation effect described later), the first effect symbol z1 that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination included in the “big hit symbol” is referred to as “the first state that forms the reach state”. It is referred to as “design z1”.
Specifically, in the normal reach variation effect, the reach state is formed by the left symbol and the right symbol. That is, in the normal reach variation effect, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the left symbol and the right symbol that are temporarily stopped are of the same type. In the normal reach variation effect, the middle symbols are normally displayed in a variable manner.
“Temporary stop display” is a state in which one type of first effect symbol z1 is moved (swinged, rotated, etc.) in a predetermined manner at the lottery result display positions in the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. A display that continues for a predetermined time.

The “pseudo-continuous effect” is an effect that inquires whether or not the next pseudo-variable effect is executed.
The “pseudo-continuous effect” is a type of pseudo-continuous effect that indicates (implies) whether or not the next pseudo-variable effect is to be executed depending on whether or not the pseudo-continuous continuation symbol is temporarily displayed.
The “pseudo continuous continuation symbol” is configured to include information (in this embodiment, “NEXT” characters) that ensues execution of the next pseudo variation effect.
In the present embodiment, “pseudo continuous effect” and “pseudo continuous end effect” are defined as “pseudo continuous effect”.
The “pseudo continuous effect” is an effect that suggests that the next pseudo-variable effect will be executed after asking whether or not the next pseudo-variable effect is executed.
Specifically, in the “pseudo continuous continuation effect”, a pseudo continuous continuation symbol (middle symbol) appears as a middle symbol, and the pseudo continuous continuation symbol moves toward the lottery result display position. At this time, the moving speed of the pseudo continuous continuation symbol is slower than the moving speed of the first effect symbol z1 in the normal variation display. In the “pseudo continuous continuation effect”, the pseudo continuous continuation symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. This suggests that the next pseudo-variation effect will be executed.
The “pseudo-continuous effect” is an effect that suggests that the next pseudo-variable effect is not executed after asking whether or not the next pseudo-variable effect is executed.
Specifically, in the “pseudo continuous end effect”, a pseudo continuous continuation symbol (middle symbol) appears as a middle symbol as in the pseudo continuous continuation effect, and the pseudo continuous continuation symbol is directed toward the lottery result display position. Move. At this time, the moving speed of the pseudo continuous continuation symbol is slower than the moving speed of the first effect symbol z1 in the normal variation display. In the “pseudo continuous end effect”, the pseudo continuous continuation symbol passes through the lottery result display position without being temporarily stopped. This suggests that the next pseudo fluctuation effect is not executed.

Specifically, in each half-time pseudo variation effect, the reach variation effect is executed after the normal variation effect is executed in response to the start. That is, after the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are normally displayed in a variable manner, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and a reach state is formed by the right symbol and the left symbol. Then, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed while the reach variation effect is being executed (when the reach state is being formed).
Each halfway pseudo-variable effect is ended in response to the end of the pseudo-continuous effect. Then, in response to the end of the midway pseudo variation effect, the next pseudo variation effect is started.
In each final pseudo variation effect, the reach variation effect is executed after the normal variation effect is executed. That is, after the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are normally displayed in a variable manner, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and a reach state is formed by the right symbol and the left symbol. Then, the pseudo-continuous end effect is executed while the reach fluctuation effect is being executed (when the reach state is being formed).
The final pseudo variation effect of each time is ended in accordance with the end of the pseudo-continuous effect. Then, the second variation effect (normal reach variation effect or super reach variation effect) is started in response to the end of the final pseudo variation effect.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, when “variation without pseudo-continuous” is selected (designated) as the type of variation mode, “various rendering without pseudo-continuous” is selected as the variation effect.
In the present embodiment, modes corresponding to various types (variation pattern numbers) of “pseudo-continuous variation” are defined as modes (variable rendering number) of “pseudo-continuous variation rendering”.
The “pseudo continuous variation effect” includes a normal variation effect as a display effect.
Specifically, in the “pseudo-continuous variation effect”, the “normal variation effect” is started in response to the start. That is, the normal variation display of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is started.
Then, in the “pseudo continuous variation effect”, the normal variation display (“normal variation effect”) of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is continued until the end of the “pseudo continuous variation effect”.
It should be noted that the pseudo variation effect (normal pseudo variation effect or special pseudo variation effect) is not executed in the pseudo continuous variation effect.

Next, the aspect of the second variation effect corresponding to each variation pattern will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, when “super reach variation” is selected (designated) as the type of variation pattern, “super reach variation effect” is selected as the second variation effect.
In the present embodiment, modes corresponding to various types of “super reach variation” (variation pattern numbers) are defined as “super reach variation effect” modes (variation effect numbers).
Specifically, as a mode of “super reach fluctuation production”, “super reach fluctuation production 1” corresponding to “super reach fluctuation 1” and “super reach fluctuation production 2” corresponding to “super reach fluctuation 2” , “Super reach variation production 3” corresponding to “Super reach variation 3”, “Super reach variation production 4” corresponding to “Super reach variation 4”, and “Super reach variation 5” corresponding to “Super reach variation 5” Production 5 ”is defined.
As a result, the expectation level of each aspect of the “super reach variation effect” is “super reach variation effect 5”, “super reach change effect 4”, “super reach change effect 3”, “ “Super reach fluctuation production 2” and “Super reach fluctuation production 1” (high expectation → low expectation).

“Super reach variation effect” (“super reach variation effect 1” to “super reach change effect 5”) includes a reach change effect, a reduced reach change effect, and an extended reach effect as display effects. ing.
The “reduction reach variation effect” refers to a display effect in which the first effect symbol z1 forming the reach state is reduced and displayed (temporary stop display). In particular, in the reduced reach variation effect, only the first effect symbol z1 that forms the reach state is displayed, and the display of the first effect symbol z1 that does not form the reach state is omitted. Specifically, in the reduced reach variation display, the right symbol and the left symbol forming the reach state are temporarily stopped in a reduced state, and the middle symbol is not displayed.

The “development reach effect” is an effect encouraging that the “hit symbol” is stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4. The development reach production is executed during the reach variation production.
In this embodiment, “Development Reach Production 1” to “Development Reach Production 5” having different contents are defined as types of development reach production.
Then, in “super reach fluctuation production 1”, “development reach production 1” is executed as the development reach production. “Development reach effect 1” includes the display of “Development reach effect image 1” on the display screen 31a. “Development reach effect image 1” is an effect image by “character A”.
On the other hand, in the “super reach fluctuation production 2”, “development reach production 2” is executed as the development reach production. “Development reach effect 2” includes the display of “development reach effect image 2” on the display screen 31a. “Development reach effect image 2” is an effect image by “character B”.
On the other hand, in the “super reach variation effect 3”, the “advance reach effect 3” is executed as the advance reach effect. “Development reach effect 3” includes display of “Development reach effect image 3” on the display screen 31a. “Development reach effect image 3” is an effect image by “character C”.
On the other hand, in the “super reach fluctuation effect 4”, the “advance reach effect 4” is executed as the advance reach effect. “Development reach effect 4” includes a display of “development reach effect image 4” on the display screen 31a. “Development reach effect image 4” is an effect image by “character D”.
On the other hand, in the “super reach fluctuation effect 5”, the “advance reach effect 5” is executed as the advance reach effect. “Development reach effect 5” includes a display of “development reach effect image 5” on the display screen 31a. “Development reach effect image 5” is an effect image by “character E”.

Specifically, in “super reach variation effect 1” to “super reach variation effect 5”, the reduced reach variation effect is executed after the normal reach variation effect is executed.
That is, from the state in which the left symbol and the right symbol form the reach state, the left symbol and the right symbol that form the reach state are reduced, and the reduced left symbol is moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 31a to reduce the size. The displayed right symbol is moved to the upper right end of the display screen 31a, and the display of the middle symbol disappears. At this time, a reach state is formed by the left symbol and the right symbol that are stopped and displayed in the stop effect related to the predetermined stop effect number.
In the “super reach variation effect 1” to “super reach variation effect 5”, during the period when the reduced reach change effect is being executed, the “development reach effect” (“development reach effect 1” to “development reach effect 5”. )) Is executed.
That is, the “development reach effect” is started in response to the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the reduced reach fluctuation effect. The “development reach production” is ended when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start.
“Super-reach fluctuation effect 1” to “super-reach fluctuation effect 5” are ended in accordance with the end of “development reach effect”. Then, the stop effect is started in response to the end of “super reach change effect 1” to “super reach change effect 5”.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, when “normal reach variation” is selected (designated) as the type of variation pattern, “normal reach variation effect” is selected as the second variation effect.
In the present embodiment, modes corresponding to various types of “normal reach variation” (variation pattern numbers) are defined as modes (variation effect numbers) of “normal reach variation effects”.
The “normal reach fluctuation effect” includes a normal reach fluctuation effect.
Specifically, in the “normal reach variation effect”, the normal reach variation effect is executed in response to the start. That is, the left symbol and the right symbol form a reach state. The normal reach variation effect is ended when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start thereof.
The “normal reach variation effect” is terminated in response to the end of the normal reach variation effect. Then, the stop effect is started in response to the end of the “normal reach fluctuation effect”.
In the normal reach variation production, the development reach production is not executed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, when “variation without reach” is selected (designated) as the type of variation pattern, “variation effect without reach” is selected as the second variation effect.
In the present embodiment, modes corresponding to various types (variation pattern numbers) of “variation without reach” are defined as modes (variation rendering number) of “reaching variation without reach”.
The “unreachable variation effect” is configured to include a normal variation effect as a display effect.
Specifically, in the “reaching variation effect without reach”, the “normal variation effect” is executed in response to the start. That is, the normal variation display of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is started.
In the “reaching variation effect without reach”, the normal variation display (“normal variation effect”) of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is continued until the end of the “reach variation variation effect”. Then, the stop effect is started in response to the end of the “non-reach fluctuation effect”.
Note that the reach variation effect and the development reach effect are not executed in the reachless change effect.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, when a predetermined variation effect is executed, a set value is suggested by the aspect (contents) of the lamp effect included in the predetermined variation effect.
In the present embodiment, when the “super reach variation effect 1” is executed, the setting value is suggested by the aspect of the lamp effect included in the “super reach change effect 1”.
That is, the mode corresponding to each set value (each of “1” to “6”) is defined as the mode (variable production number) of “super reach variation production 1”. Specifically, as the form (variation effect number) of “super reach variation effect 1”, “super reach variation effect 1A” corresponding to set value = “1” and “super reach corresponding to set value =“ 2 ”. Reach variation effect 1B ”,“ Super reach variation effect 1C ”corresponding to setting value =“ 3 ”,“ Super reach variation effect 1D ”corresponding to setting value =“ 4 ”, and setting value =“ 5 ” A corresponding “super reach variation effect 1E” and a “super reach variation effect 1F” corresponding to the set value = “6” are defined.
“Super reach variation effect 1” (“super reach change effect 1A” to “super reach change effect 1F”) includes a display effect, a sound effect, and a lamp effect. In “super reach variation effect 1A” to “super reach variation effect 1F”, the display effect and the sound effect are the same (contents). On the other hand, in “super reach fluctuation effect 1A” to “super reach fluctuation effect 1F”, the aspects (contents) of the lamp effect are different from each other.

In the present embodiment, “super reach 1 lamp effect A” is registered as the lamp effect (lamp effect number) in the effect control table corresponding to “super reach fluctuation effect 1A”. Thereby, in the “super reach variation effect 1A”, the “super reach 1 lamp effect A” is executed as the lamp effect.
On the other hand, in the effect control table corresponding to “super reach fluctuation effect 1B”, “super reach 1 lamp effect B” is registered as the lamp effect (lamp effect number). Thereby, in the “super reach variation effect 1B”, the “super reach 1 lamp effect B” is executed as the lamp effect.
On the other hand, in the effect control table corresponding to “super reach fluctuation effect 1C”, “super reach 1 lamp effect C” is registered as the lamp effect (lamp effect number). Thus, in the “super reach variation effect 1C”, the “super reach 1 lamp effect C” is executed as the lamp effect.
On the other hand, in the effect control table corresponding to “super reach fluctuation effect 1D”, “super reach 1 lamp effect D” is registered as the lamp effect (lamp effect number). Thus, in the “super reach variation effect 1D”, the “super reach 1 lamp effect D” is executed as the lamp effect.
On the other hand, in the effect control table corresponding to “super reach fluctuation effect 1E”, “super reach 1 lamp effect E” is registered as a lamp effect (lamp effect number). Thus, in the “super reach variation effect 1E”, the “super reach 1 lamp effect E” is executed as the lamp effect.
On the other hand, in the effect control table corresponding to “super reach fluctuation effect 1F”, “super reach 1 lamp effect F” is registered as the lamp effect (lamp effect number). Thus, in the “super reach variation effect 1F”, the “super reach 1 lamp effect F” is executed as the lamp effect.

In “Super Reach 1 Lamp Effect A” to “Super Reach 1 Lamp Effect F”, the number of light emitting elements that emit light at a predetermined timing, the number of light emitting elements that emit light at a predetermined timing, and the emission color of the predetermined light emitting elements. At least one of the light emission pattern of the light emitting element during the predetermined period and the timing at which the predetermined light emitting element emits light is different. Here, the light emitting element refers to a light emitting element included in the frame lamp 20, a light emitting element included in the button lamp, a light emitting element included in the panel lamp 21, and the like.
In “Super Reach 1 Lamp Effect A” to “Super Reach 1 Lamp Effect F” according to the present embodiment, the light emitting elements included in the panel lamp 21 emit light (light on) in the same pattern. In “Super Reach 1 Lamp Effect A” to “Super Reach 1 Lamp Effect F”, among the plurality of light emitting elements included in the panel lamp 21, a predetermined light emitting element (hereinafter referred to as “first specific light emitting element”). ) Are different from each other.
Specifically, in “Super Reach 1 Lamp Effect A” to “Super Reach 1 Lamp Effect F”, the first specific light emitting element emits light (lights up) when a predetermined trigger occurs (for example, when a reach state is formed). Is done. At this time, in “Super Reach 1 Lamp Effect A”, the first specific light emitting element emits “white”, and in “Super Reach 1 Lamp Effect B”, the first specific light emitting element emits “blue”. In “Super Reach 1 Lamp Effect C”, the first specific light emitting element emits “green”, and in “Super Reach 1 Lamp Effect D”, the first specific light emitting element emits “red”, and “Super Reach 1 Lamp” In the “effect E”, the first specific light emitting element emits “gold”, and in the “super reach 1 lamp effect F”, the first specific light emitting element emits “rainbow (multicolor)”.
In “Super Reach 1 Lamp Effect A” to “Super Reach 1 Lamp Effect F”, the first specific element emits “white” except when a predetermined opportunity occurs.
Thus, in “Super Reach 1 Lamp Effect A” to “Super Reach 1 Lamp Effect F”, a set value is suggested by the color (light emission color) of the first specific light emitting element that emits light when a predetermined trigger occurs.

In the pachinko machine 1, when “super reach variation 1” is selected (designated) as the variation pattern type, it is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 as the effect control table of the second effect change An effect control table corresponding to the set value is selected (set).
At this time, when the set value = “1”, the effect control table corresponding to “super reach change effect 1A” is selected as the effect control table of the second change effect, and the set value = “2”. In this case, the effect control table corresponding to “super reach change effect 1B” is selected as the effect control table of the second change effect, and when the set value = “3”, the effect control of the second change effect is performed. When the effect control table corresponding to “Super Reach Variation Effect 1C” is selected as the table and the set value = “4”, “Super Reach Variation Effect 1D” is set as the second variation effect effect control table. When the corresponding production control table is selected and the setting value = “5”, the production system corresponding to “super reach fluctuation production 1E” is used as the production control table of the second fluctuation production. Table is selected, when the setting value = a "6", as effect control table of the second variation effect, effect control table corresponding to the "super reach varying effect 1F" is selected.

Here, in the present embodiment, modes corresponding to the respective set values (each of “1” to “6”) are defined as modes of “super reach fluctuation effect 1”.
However, as modes of “super reach fluctuation effect 1”, there are a first mode corresponding to setting values = “1” to “3” and a second mode corresponding to setting values = “4” to “6”. It may be configured as specified.
In such a configuration, the “super reach 1 lamp effect B” is registered as the lamp effect (lamp effect number) in the effect control table corresponding to the first mode, and the effect control corresponding to the second mode is registered. The “Super Reach 1 Lamp Effect D” is registered in the table as the lamp effect (lamp effect number).
Accordingly, the set value (set value = “1” to “3” or the set value = “4” depending on the color (“blue” or “red”) of the first specific light emitting element that emits light when a predetermined trigger occurs. ”To“ 6 ”).

Next, the main notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, the main notice effect is executed while the change effect is being executed.
The “main notice effect” is an effect executed during the variation effect, and suggests the result of start determination (special figure winning determination, special figure stop symbol determination, special diagram variation pattern determination, etc.) related to the variable effect. It has become a directing.
In the present embodiment, the main notice effect is executed during the first variation effect. The main notice effect suggests the result of the special figure variation pattern determination (specifically, the variation pattern type may be “super-reach variation”).
The main notice effect includes a display effect, a sound effect, and a lamp effect.
In the present embodiment, “slash cutting notice” is defined as the type of main notice effect.

Depending on the effect mode (the content of the notification effect image to be described later), the “slashing advance notice” may be a second variation effect mode (specifically, the second variation effect mode may be a “super reach variation effect” ( (Expectation).
In the slashing notice, the operation valid state is set (started) in response to the start, and the display of the button effect image on the display screen 31a is started.
The operation valid state of the slashing advance notice depends on whether one of the following conditions is satisfied: the pressing operation of the effect button 5b is detected during the setting, and the predetermined upper limit time has elapsed since the start (setting). Canceled (terminated).
In particular, in the slashing notice effect, the display of the button effect image is terminated on the display screen 31a and the display of the notice effect image is started in response to the release of the operation enabled state.
The “button effect image” is an image that prompts the user to press the effect button 5b. Specifically, the button effect image includes a graphic imitating the effect button 5b, information that prompts the user to press the effect button 5b (in this embodiment, “PUSH”), and until the operation valid state is released. Information indicating the remaining time (in this embodiment, a time bar indicating the remaining time).
The “notice effect image” is an image that suggests a mode of the second variation effect. Specifically, the notice effect image is an effect image in which the screen is torn and characters suggesting the mode of the second variation effect appear.
In this embodiment, “slash cutting notice 1” to “slash cutting notice 5” are defined as the types (modes) of cutting notice.
In the “slash cutting notice 1”, a “slash cutting notice image 1” is displayed as a notice effect image. In the slashing preview image 1, the screen is torn and the characters “chance !?” are displayed.
In “Sword-cutting notice 2”, “Sword-cutting notice 2” is displayed as a notice effect image. In the slashing preview image 2, the screen is torn and the characters “Great chance !?” are displayed.
In “Tsubakiri notice 3”, “Tsubakiri notice 3” is displayed as a notice effect image. In the slashing preview image 3, the screen is torn and the characters “Intense heat !?” are displayed.
In the “slash cutting notice 4”, the “slash cutting notice 4” is displayed as a notice effect image. In the slash cutting notice image 4, the screen is torn and the characters “super heat !?” are displayed.
In “Scarlet notice 5”, “Sword notice 5” is displayed as a notice effect image. In the slashing preview image 5, the screen is torn and the characters “Ranbu!” Are displayed.
The expectation level of each of the slashing notices is “Scarlet notice 5”, “Slash notice 4”, “Slash notice 3”, “Slash notice 2”, and “Slash notice 1” (expectation). High → low expectation).

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, when the “slashing advance notice 5” is executed, the setting value is suggested by the aspect (contents) of the lamp effect included in the “slashing advance notice 5”.
That is, the mode corresponding to each set value (each of “1” to “6”) is defined as the mode (notification effect number) of “Slashing advance notice 5”. Specifically, as the mode (notice production notice number) of “辻 slash advance notice 5”, “辻 slash advance notice 5A” corresponding to the set value = “1” and “辻 slash advance notice 5B” corresponding to the set value = “2”, The setting value = “3” corresponding to the “cutter cutting notice 5C”, the setting value = “4” corresponding to the “cutter cutting notice 5D”, and the setting value = “5” corresponding to the “cutter cutting notice 5E”. “Sword-cutting notice 5F” corresponding to value = “6” is defined.
The “slash cutting notice 5” (“slash cutting notice 5A” to “slash cutting notice 5F”) includes a display effect, a sound effect, and a lamp effect. Then, in the “sword-cutting notice 5A” to “sword-cutting notice 5F”, the display effects and the sound effects have the same mode (contents). On the other hand, in the “slash cutting notice 5A” to “slash cutting notice 5F”, the modes (contents) of lamp effects are different from each other.

In the present embodiment, in the effect control table corresponding to “Scarlet notice 5A”, as the lamp effect (lamp effect number) executed in response to the detection of the pressing operation of the effect button 5b during the setting of the operation valid state, “ “Cutter cut notice 5 lamp production A” is registered. As a result, in the “slashing advance notice 5A”, the “slashing advance notice 5 lamp effect A” is executed when the effect button 5b is pressed while the operation valid state is set.
On the other hand, in the effect control table corresponding to “Scarlet notice 5B”, “Sword kill notice 5” is displayed as the lamp effect (lamp effect number) executed in response to the detection of the pressing operation of the effect button 5b during the setting of the operation valid state. “Ramp effect B” is registered. As a result, in the “slashing advance notice 5B”, the “slashing advance notice 5 lamp effect B” is executed when the effect button 5b is pressed while the operation valid state is set.
On the other hand, in the effect control table corresponding to “Scarlet notice 5C”, “Scarf notice 5C” is indicated as the lamp effect (lamp effect number) executed in response to the detection of the pressing operation of the effect button 5b during the setting of the operation valid state. "Ramp effect C" is registered. As a result, in the “slashing advance notice 5C”, the “slashing advance notice 5 lamp effect C” is executed when the effect button 5b is pressed while the operation valid state is set.
On the other hand, in the effect control table corresponding to “Dragon cutting notice 5D”, “Dragon cutting notice 5D” is displayed as the lamp effect (lamp effect number) executed in response to detection of the pressing operation of the effect button 5b during the setting of the operation valid state. “Ramp effect D” is registered. As a result, in the “slashing advance notice 5D”, the “slashing advance notice 5 lamp effect D” is executed when the effect button 5b is pressed while the operation valid state is set.
On the other hand, in the effect control table corresponding to “Scarlet notice 5E”, the lamp effect (lamp effect number) that is executed in response to the detection of the press operation of the effect button 5b during the setting of the operation valid state is displayed. “Ramp effect E” is registered. As a result, in the “slashing advance notice 5E”, the “slashing advance notice 5 lamp effect E” is executed when the effect button 5b is pressed while the operation valid state is set.
On the other hand, in the effect control table corresponding to “Scarlet notice 5F”, “Scarf notice 5” is indicated as the lamp effect (lamp effect number) executed in response to the detection of the pressing operation of the effect button 5b during the setting of the operation valid state. “Ramp effect F” is registered. As a result, in the “slashing advance notice 5F”, the “slashing advance notice 5 lamp effect F” is executed when the effect button 5b is pressed while the operation valid state is set.

Then, in “Tsubakiri notice 5 lamp presentation A” to “Tsubakiri notice 5 lamp presentation F”, the number of light emitting elements that emit light at a predetermined timing, the number of light emitting elements that emit light at a predetermined timing, and the emission color of the predetermined light emitting elements. At least one of the light emission pattern of the light emitting element during the predetermined period and the timing at which the predetermined light emitting element emits light is different. Here, the light emitting element refers to a light emitting element included in the frame lamp 20, a light emitting element included in the button lamp, a light emitting element included in the panel lamp 21, and the like.
In the “slashing notice 5 lamp effect A” to “sword cutting notice 5 lamp effect F” according to the present embodiment, the light emitting elements included in the button lamps emit light (light up) in a predetermined pattern. Further, in “Tsubakiri notice 5 lamp production A” to “Tsubakiri notice 5 lamp production F”, the light emitting color and the number of times of light emission of the light emitting elements included in the button lamp are different from each other.
Specifically, in “Scarlet notice 5 lamp effect A” to “Sword kill notice 5 lamp effect F”, the light emitting elements included in the button lamps emit light (light on) in response to the start. At this time, in the “slashing notice 5 lamp effect A”, the light emitting element included in the button lamp emits light 1 [time], and “white” is emitted in each light emission. On the other hand, in the “slashing notice 5 lamp effect B”, the light-emitting elements included in the button lamps emit 2 [times] at predetermined intervals, and “blue” is emitted in each emission. On the other hand, in the “butterfly cutting 5 lamp effect C”, the light-emitting elements included in the button lamps emit 3 [times] at predetermined intervals, and “green” is emitted in each light emission. On the other hand, in the “slashing notice 5 lamp effect D”, the light-emitting elements included in the button lamps emit light 4 [times] at predetermined intervals, and “red” is emitted in each light emission. On the other hand, in the “slashing notice 5 lamp effect E”, the light emitting elements included in the button lamps emit 5 [times] at predetermined intervals, and “golden” is emitted in each light emission. On the other hand, in the “slashing notice 5 lamp effect F”, the light emitting elements included in the button lamps emit light 6 [times] at a predetermined interval, and light is emitted in a color different from the previous light emission in each light emission.
As a result, in “Scarlet notice 5 lamp effect A” to “Sword kill notice 5 lamp effect F”, the set value is suggested by the light emission color and the number of times of light emission of the light emitting element included in the effect button.

In the pachinko machine 1, when “slashing advance notice 5” is selected as the type (mode) of the advance notice, the effect is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 as an effect control table for the main advance notice (ie, advance notice) ( An effect control table corresponding to the stored value is selected (set).
At this time, when the set value = “1”, the effect control table corresponding to “Scarlet notice 5A” is selected as the effect control table of the main notice effect, and when the set value = “2”. When the production control table corresponding to “Scarlet notice 5B” is selected as the effect control table for the main notice effect, and the set value = “3”, the effect control table for the main notice effect is shown as “Samurai notice 5C. Is selected and the set value = “4”, the effect control table corresponding to “Scarlet notice 5D” is selected as the effect control table for the main notice effect, and the set value = In the case of “5”, the production control table corresponding to “Scarlet notice 5E” is selected as the production control table of the main notice production, and in the case where the setting value = “6”. As the effect control table of the main announcement attraction, the effect control table corresponding to the "tsujigiri notice 5F" is selected.

Here, in the present embodiment, the mode corresponding to each set value (each of “1” to “6”) is defined as the mode of “slashing advance notice 5”.
However, the first mode corresponding to the setting value = “1” to “3” and the second mode corresponding to the setting value = “4” to “6” are defined as the mode of the “cutting notice 5”. It does not matter as a configuration.
In the case of such a configuration, in the effect control table corresponding to the first aspect, as the lamp effect (lamp effect number) executed in response to the detection of the pressing operation of the effect button 5b during the setting of the operation valid state, Is registered in the effect control table corresponding to the second mode, and the lamp effect (lamp effect) that is executed in response to the detection of the pressing operation of the effect button 5b during the setting of the operation valid state is registered. No.) as described above, the above-mentioned “slashing notice 5 lamp effect D” is registered.
Thus, the color (“blue” or “red”) of the button lamp (light emitting element) emitted in response to the pressing operation of the effect button 5b during the setting of the operation valid state and the number of times of light emission (2 [times] or 4 [ Times)) can indicate a set value (set value = “1” to “3” or set value = “4” to “6”).

Next, a sub-notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, the sub-notice effect is executed while the change effect is being executed.
The “sub-notice effect” is an effect executed during the variation effect, and suggests the result of the start determination (special figure winning determination, special figure stop symbol determination, special diagram variation pattern determination, etc.) related to the variable effect. It has become a directing.
In the present embodiment, the sub-notice effect indicates the result of the special figure winning determination (specifically, the possibility of a “big hit”).
The sub-notice effect includes a display effect, a sound effect, and a lamp effect.
In the present embodiment, “character notice” is defined as a type of sub notice effect.

“Character notice” indicates the result (expectation) of the special figure winning determination according to the effect mode (the contents of the character notice image described later).
The character notice includes the display of the character notice image on the display screen 31a.
In this embodiment, “character notice 1” to “character notice 5” are defined as the types (modes) of character notice.
In “character notice 1”, “character notice image 1” is displayed as a character notice image. In the character preview image 1, “character A” is displayed.
In “character notice 2”, “character notice image 2” is displayed as a character notice image. In the character preview image 2, “Character B” is displayed.
In “character notice 3”, “character notice image 3” is displayed as a character notice image. In the character preview image 3, “character C” is displayed.
In “character notice 4”, “character notice image 4” is displayed as a character notice image. In the character preview image 4, “Character D” is displayed.
In “character notice 5”, “character notice image 5” is displayed as a character notice image. In the character preview image 5, “character E” is displayed.

Next, the jackpot effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, the big hit effect is executed during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state.
The “big hit effect” is an effect executed during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, and the type of the big hit gaming state (the number of round games executed during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, This is an effect that suggests the game state after the end (“special figure high probability state” or “special figure low probability state”, the number of times after the end of the jackpot game state, etc.).
The “hit-winning effect” indicates the type of the big-hit gaming state according to the effect mode (contents of the big-hit effect image described later).
The jackpot effect includes an opening effect performed during the opening period, an interval effect performed during the interval period, a round effect performed during the round game, and an ending effect performed during the ending period. It consists of
The “opening period” refers to a period from the start of the big hit gaming state until the opening time elapses. The “interval period” refers to a period from the end of the opening period to the start of the first round game, or a period from the end of each round game to the start of the next round game. The ending period is a period from the end of the interval period after the end of the last round game until the ending time elapses.
The jackpot effect (opening effect, interval effect, round effect, and ending effect) includes a display effect, a sound effect, and a lamp effect. In particular, the jackpot effect includes a display of a jackpot effect image on the display screen 31a as a display effect.

In the present embodiment, “hit hit effect 1” to “hit hit effect 9” are defined as types (modes) of the jackpot effect.
“Big jackpot effect 1” is selected when “Big jackpot 1 symbol” is stopped and displayed. “Big hit effect 2” is selected when “Big hit 2 symbols” is stopped. “Big jackpot effect 3” is selected when “Big jackpot 3 symbols” is stopped and displayed. “Big hit effect 4” is selected when “Big hit 4 symbols” is stopped. “Big hit effect 5” is selected when “Big hit 5 symbols” is stopped and displayed.
The “big hit effect 6” is selected when the “big hit 6 symbols” or the “big hit 7 symbols” is stopped. “Big hit effect 7” is selected when “hit 8 symbols” is stopped. “Big hit effect 8” is selected when “Big hit 9 symbols” is stopped and displayed. “Big hit effect 9” is selected when “Big hit 10 symbols” is stopped.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, when the “big hit effect 6” is executed, the setting value is suggested by the aspect (contents) of the lamp effect included in the big hit effect.
That is, the mode corresponding to each set value (each of “1” to “6”) is defined as the mode of “big hit effect 6” (notice effect number). Specifically, as the mode of “big hit effect 6” (big hit effect number), “big hit effect 6A” corresponding to the set value = “1” and “big hit effect 6B” corresponding to the set value = “2” , A “big hit effect 6C” corresponding to the set value = “3”, a “big hit effect 6D” corresponding to the set value = “4”, and a “big hit effect 6E” corresponding to the set value = “5”. “Big hit effect 6F” corresponding to value = “6” is defined.
The “hit hit effect 6” (“hit hit effect 6A” to “hit hit effect 6F”) includes a display effect, a sound effect, and a lamp effect. In the “hit hit effect 6A” to “hit hit effect 6F”, the display effect and the sound effect are the same. On the other hand, in the “hit hit effect 6A” to “hit hit effect 6F”, the aspect (contents) of the lamp effect are different from each other.

In the present embodiment, the effect control table corresponding to “big hit effect 6A” has a lamp effect (lamp effect) that is executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity (for example, the start of the last round game, the start of the ending period). No.) is registered as “Big hit 6 lamp production A”. Thus, in the “big hit effect 6A”, the “big hit 6 lamp effect A” is executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity.
On the other hand, in the effect control table corresponding to the “big hit effect 6B”, as a lamp effect (lamp effect number) executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity (for example, the start of the last round game, the start of the ending period). "Big hit 6 lamp production B" is registered. Thus, in the “big hit effect 6B”, the “big hit 6 lamp effect B” is executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity.
On the other hand, in the effect control table corresponding to the “big hit effect 6C”, as a lamp effect (lamp effect number) executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity (for example, the start of the last round game, the start of the ending period). "Big hit 6 lamp production C" is registered. Thus, in the “big hit effect 6C”, the “big hit 6 lamp effect C” is executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity.
On the other hand, in the effect control table corresponding to the “big hit effect 6D”, as a lamp effect (lamp effect number) executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity (for example, the start of the last round game, the start of the ending period). "Big hit 6 lamp production D" is registered. Thus, in the “big hit effect 6D”, the “big hit 6 lamp effect D” is executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity.
On the other hand, in the effect control table corresponding to the “big hit effect 6E”, as a lamp effect (lamp effect number) executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity (for example, the start of the last round game, the start of the ending period). "Big hit 6 lamp production E" is registered. Thus, in the “big hit effect 6E”, the “big hit 6 lamp effect E” is executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity.
On the other hand, in the effect control table corresponding to the “big hit effect 6F”, as a lamp effect (lamp effect number) executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity (for example, the start of the last round game, the start of the ending period). "Big hit 6 lamp production F" is registered. Thus, in the “big hit effect 6F”, the “big hit 6 lamp effect F” is executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity.

In “big hit 6 lamp production A” to “big hit 6 lamp production F”, the number of light emitting elements that emit light at a predetermined timing, the number of light emitting elements that emit light at a predetermined timing, the emission color of the predetermined light emitting elements, the predetermined color At least one of the light emission pattern of the light emitting element during the period and the timing at which the predetermined light emitting element emits light is different. Here, the light emitting element refers to a light emitting element included in the frame lamp 20, a light emitting element included in the button lamp, a light emitting element included in the panel lamp 21, and the like.
Here, the frame lamp 20 is configured to include a predetermined number (6 [pieces] in the present embodiment) of the second specific light emitting elements. In the “big hit 6 lamp effect A” to “big hit 6 lamp effect F”, a predetermined number of light emitting elements among the six second specific light emitting elements are emitted (lighted) in a predetermined pattern. In this case, the numbers of second specific light emitting elements that emit light in a predetermined pattern are different from each other in “big hit 6 lamp effect A” to “big hit 6 lamp effect F”.
Specifically, in the “big hit 6 lamp effect A” to “big hit 6 lamp effect F”, a predetermined number of light emitting elements out of the six second specific light emitting elements emit light in a predetermined pattern ( Lit). At this time, in the “big hit 6 lamp production A”, one second specific light emitting element among the six second specific light emitting elements emits light in a predetermined pattern. On the other hand, in the “big hit 6 lamp production B”, of the six second specific light emitting elements, two second specific light emitting elements emit light in a predetermined pattern. On the other hand, in the “big hit 6 lamp effect C”, among the six second specific light emitting elements, three second specific light emitting elements emit light in a predetermined pattern. On the other hand, in the “big hit 6 lamp production D”, of the six second specific light emitting elements, four second specific light emitting elements emit light in a predetermined pattern. On the other hand, in the “big hit 6 lamp effect E”, among the 6 second specific light emitting elements, 5 second specific light emitting elements emit light in a predetermined pattern. On the other hand, in the “big hit 6 lamp effect F”, all of the six second specific light emitting elements emit light in a predetermined pattern.
Accordingly, in “big hit 6 lamp effect A” to “big hit 6 lamp effect F”, a set value is suggested depending on the number of second specific light emitting elements that emit light.

In the pachinko machine 1, when “big hit effect 6” or “big hit effect 7” is selected as the type (mode) of the big hit effect, it is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 as an effect control table for the big hit effect. An effect control table corresponding to the stored value is selected (set).
At this time, when the set value = “1”, the effect control table corresponding to “big hit effect 6A” is selected as the effect control table for the big hit effect, and when the set value = “2”, When the effect control table corresponding to “hit effect 6B” is selected as the effect control table for the jackpot effect, and the set value = “3”, the effect control table for the jackpot effect corresponds to “hit effect 6C”. If the effect control table to be selected is selected and the set value = “4”, the effect control table corresponding to the “big hit effect 6D” is selected as the effect control table for the big hit effect, and the set value = “5”. In some cases, an effect control table corresponding to “hit effect 6E” is selected as the effect control table for the jackpot effect, and when the set value = “6”, the effect control table for the jackpot effect is selected. As a table, the performance control table corresponding to the "big hit effect 6F" is selected.

Here, in the present embodiment, modes corresponding to the set values (each of “1” to “6”) are defined as modes of “big hit effect 6”.
However, as a mode of “big hit effect 6”, a first mode corresponding to setting values = “1” to “3” and a second mode corresponding to setting values = “4” to “6” are defined. It does not matter as a configuration.
In the case of such a configuration, in the effect control table corresponding to the first mode, the above “big hit 6 lamp effect A” is registered as the lamp effect (lamp effect number) executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity. In the effect control table corresponding to the second mode, the above “big hit 6 lamp effect C” is registered as the lamp effect (lamp effect number) executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity.
Thus, depending on the number (one or three) of the second specific light emitting elements that emit light in response to the occurrence of a predetermined trigger, the set value (set value = “1” to “3”, or set value = "4" to "6") can be suggested.

Next, a demonstration effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, the standby state starts (sets) when a predetermined time has elapsed without starting the special special symbol variation display from the end of the special game (big hit game state or special symbol stop display) ) The standby state is ended (released) in response to the start of the special symbol variation display (game balls entering the start ports 51 and 52).
Then, the production control circuit 300 starts the demonstration production in response to the start of the standby state. The demonstration effect is ended in response to the end of the standby state.
The “demonstration effect” is an effect suggesting that the standby state is being generated (the customer waiting state is being generated). The demonstration effect includes a display effect, a sound effect, and a lamp effect. Particularly, the demonstration effect includes a display of a demonstration effect image on the display screen 31a.

Specifically, the production control circuit 300 starts measuring the standby time by the standby time monitoring timer in response to receiving the stop designation command. In addition, the production control circuit 300 starts measuring the standby time by the standby time monitoring timer in response to receiving the ending designation command.
On the other hand, in response to receiving the symbol type designation command (which may be a variation mode designation command or a variation pattern designation command), the effect control circuit 300 ends the waiting time measurement by the waiting time monitoring timer. In addition, the production control circuit 300 ends the measurement of the standby time by the standby time monitoring timer in response to the reception of the opening designation command.
Then, in response to the standby time measured by the standby time monitoring timer reaching a predetermined time, the effect control circuit 300 sets “1” in the standby state flag area of the RAM and starts the standby state. In addition, the production control circuit 300, when “1” is set in the flag area during the standby state, the number-of-holds designation command (design type designation command, variation mode designation) for designating that the number of holds has increased by “1”. In response to the reception of a command or a variation pattern designation command), “0” is set in the waiting state flag area, and the standby state is terminated.
Furthermore, the production control circuit 300 starts the demonstration production in response to the start of the standby state. Specifically, the effect control circuit 300 sets an effect control table corresponding to the demonstration effect in a predetermined area of the RAM in response to the standby time measured by the standby time monitoring timer reaching a predetermined time. Thereby, the demonstration effect based on the effect control table set in the predetermined area of the RAM is started.
Here, the effect control circuit 300 is based on the effect control table set in the predetermined area of the RAM during the period in which the standby state occurs (during the period in which “1” is set in the standby state flag area). Repeated demonstration performance. That is, the effect control circuit 300 again performs the effect control in response to the completion of the processing based on all the process data (last process data) registered in the effect control table set in the predetermined area of the RAM. For the process data registered in the table, processing based on each process data is started in order from the first process data.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, when the demonstration effect is executed, the setting value is suggested by the aspect (contents) of the lamp effect included in the demonstration effect.
That is, a mode corresponding to each set value is defined as a mode of demonstration effect (demonstration number). Specifically, as a demonstration effect mode (demonstration effect number), “demonstration effect A1” and “demo effect A2” corresponding to setting values = “1” to “3”, and setting values = “4” to “4” “Demo effect B1” and “Demo effect B2” corresponding to “6” are defined.
Demo effects (“Demo effect A1”, “Demo effect A2”, “Demo effect B1” and “Demo effect B2”) include a display effect, a sound effect, and a lamp effect. And in "demonstration effect A1" and "demonstration effect B1", the aspect (contents) of a display effect and a sound effect are mutually the same. Further, in “demonstration effect A2” and “demonstration effect B2”, the aspect (contents) of the display effect and the sound effect are the same. On the other hand, the “demonstration effect A1” and the “demonstration effect B1” are different from each other in the aspect (contents) of the lamp effect. In addition, the “demonstration effect A2” and the “demonstration effect B2” are different from each other in the aspect (contents) of the lamp effect.

In the present embodiment, the effect control table corresponding to “demonstration effect A1” includes a lamp effect (lamp effect) that is executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity (for example, when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the demo effect). “Demo lamp effect A1” is registered as the number). Thereby, in the “demonstration effect A1”, the “demo lamp effect A1” is executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity.
On the other hand, the effect control table corresponding to “demonstration effect A2” has a lamp effect (lamp effect number) executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity (for example, when the second predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the demo effect). "Demo lamp production A2" is registered. Thereby, in the “demonstration effect A2”, the “demo lamp effect A2” is executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity.
On the other hand, the effect control table corresponding to “demonstration effect B1” includes a lamp effect (lamp effect number) that is executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity (for example, when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the demo effect). "Demo lamp production B1" is registered. Thereby, in the “demonstration effect B1”, the “demo lamp effect B1” is executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity.
On the other hand, the effect control table corresponding to “demonstration effect B2” includes a lamp effect (lamp effect number) that is executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity (for example, when the second predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the demo effect). "Demo lamp effect B2" is registered. Thereby, in the “demonstration effect B2”, the “demo lamp effect B2” is executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity.

In “Demo lamp effect A1” and “Demo lamp effect B1”, the number of light emitting elements that emit light at a predetermined timing, the number of light emitting elements that emit light at a predetermined timing, the emission color of the predetermined light emitting elements, and the light emission during a predetermined period. At least one of the light emission pattern of the element and the timing at which the predetermined light emitting element emits light is different. Here, the light emitting element refers to a light emitting element included in the frame lamp 20, a light emitting element included in the button lamp, a light emitting element included in the panel lamp 21, and the like.
In “Demo lamp effect A2” and “Demo lamp effect B2”, the number of light emitting elements that emit light at a predetermined timing, the number of light emitting elements that emit light at a predetermined timing, the emission color of the predetermined light emitting elements, and the light emission during a predetermined period. At least one of the light emission pattern of the element and the timing at which the predetermined light emitting element emits light is different. Here, the light emitting element refers to a light emitting element included in the frame lamp 20, a light emitting element included in the button lamp, a light emitting element included in the panel lamp 21, and the like.
Here, the frame lamp 20 is configured to include a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 2 [pieces]) of third specific light emitting elements (third light emitting element A and third light emitting element B).
And in "Demo lamp production A1" and "Demo lamp production B1", according to the start, the 3rd light emitting element A and the 3rd light emitting element B are light-emitted (lighted) by a predetermined pattern. At this time, in the “demonstration lamp effect A1” and the “demo lamp effect B1”, the third light emitting element A and the third light emitting element B emit light (light on) in different patterns.
Specifically, in the “demonstration lamp effect A1,” the third light emitting elements are arranged in the order of the third light emitting element A, the third light emitting element B, the third light emitting element B, and the third light emitting element A according to the start thereof. The light is emitted sequentially. On the other hand, in the “demonstration lamp effect B1”, the third light emitting elements are sequentially arranged in the order of the third light emitting element B, the third light emitting element A, the third light emitting element A, and the third light emitting element B according to the start thereof. Emits light.
As a result, in “Demo lamp effect A1” and “Demo lamp effect B1”, the set value is suggested by the light emission pattern of the third specific light emitting element.
In addition, in “demonstration effect A2” and “demonstration effect B2”, a predetermined character image is displayed on the display screen 31a as a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the “demonstration lamp effect A2”, the third light emitting element A emits light when a predetermined character image is displayed on the display screen 31a. On the other hand, in the “demonstration lamp effect B2”, the third light emitting element A does not emit light when a predetermined character image is displayed on the display screen 31a.
Thereby, in “Demo lamp effect A2” and “Demo lamp effect B2”, a set value is suggested depending on whether or not the third specific light emitting element A emits light when a predetermined character image is displayed.
In the demonstration effect according to the present embodiment, the third specific light emitting elements (third light emitting element A and third light emitting element B) are “demonstration lamp effect A1”, “demo lamp effect A2”, “demo lamp effect B1” and “ Light is emitted only in the demonstration lamp effect B2 ", and is not emitted in other lamp effects during the demonstration effect.

In the pachinko machine 1, an effect control table corresponding to a set value stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 is selected (set) as an effect control table of the demonstration effect according to the start of the standby state )
At this time, when the set value = “1” to “3”, one of “demonstration effect A1” and “demonstration effect A2” is selected by lottery as a demonstration effect. Then, an effect control table corresponding to the selected mode (“demonstration effect A1” or “demonstration effect A2”) is set.
On the other hand, when the set value = “4” to “6”, one of the “demonstration effect B1” and the “demonstration effect B2” is selected by lottery as the demonstration effect. Then, an effect control table corresponding to the selected mode (“demonstration effect B1” or “demo effect B2”) is set.

(Processing executed by the effect control circuit 300)
Next, processing executed by the CPU of the effect control circuit 300 will be described.
First, the CPU initialization process executed by the CPU of the effect control circuit 300 will be described.
The effect control circuit 300 is provided with a reset circuit (not shown). The reset circuit generates a reset signal when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.
The CPU of the effect control circuit 300 starts a CPU initialization process (not shown) in response to the generation of a reset signal by the reset circuit.
When the CPU initialization process is started, first, various registers, various timers (frame timer, phase timer, etc.), clock pulse oscillator, various RAMs, etc. are initialized. Next, effect random number update processing for updating various effect random numbers is executed. Thereafter, the effect random number update process is repeatedly executed until various interrupt processes described later are executed.

Next, command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the effect control circuit 300 will be described.
The CPU of the effect control circuit 300 executes a command reception interrupt process (not shown) in response to receiving a control command from the main control circuit 200.
In the command reception interrupt process, the control command received from the main control circuit 200 is stored (stored) in the reception buffer area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

Next, sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the effect control circuit 300 will be described.
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing sub-timer interrupt processing.
The effect control circuit 300 includes a clock pulse generation circuit. The clock pulse generation circuit generates a clock pulse signal every predetermined period.
The CPU of the effect control circuit 300 starts the sub-timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 34 at predetermined intervals based on the generation of the clock pulse by the clock pulse generation circuit. When the sub timer interrupt process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S31-1.
In step S31-1, a register saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-2. In the register saving process, the register value is saved in the saving area of the RAM.
In step S31-2, timer update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-3. In the timer update process, various timers provided in the effect control circuit 300 are updated.
In step S31-3, command analysis processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-4. In the command analysis process, a control command stored in the reception buffer of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 is analyzed, and a process corresponding to the received control command is executed. The command analysis process will be described later.

In step S31-4, a time schedule management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-5. In the time schedule management process, the progress of each performance is managed.
Here, in the ROM of the effect control circuit 300, each effect (each aspect of the reserved effect (each effect number), each aspect of the variable effect (each effect number), each aspect of the stop effect (each effect number), main notice Production control corresponding to each mode of production (each production number), each mode of sub-notice production (each production number), each mode of jackpot production (each production number), each mode of demonstration production (each production number), etc. The table is stored.
The “effect control table” is information that defines the progress of the effects (display effects, sound effects, lamp effects, movable object effects, etc.).
In each effect control table, a plurality of process data are registered in time series. Each process data includes one or a plurality of command information. Each command information is a process of designating the start of a predetermined effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect or movable object effect). In particular, each command information includes information for specifying the contents of the effect to be started (display effect number, sound effect number, lamp effect number, or movable object effect number).

In the time schedule management process, an effect control table corresponding to each effect set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 and an effect management timer corresponding to the effect (effect management timer for measuring the elapsed time of the effect) ) To manage the progress of the production.
Specifically, for each effect, the process based on the process data corresponding to the current value of the effect management timer among the process data registered in the effect control table is executed. Thereby, the command information included in the process data is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
Specifically, when the process data corresponding to the value of the current production management timer includes command information for designating the start of the display production (display production number), the designation information is used as the production control circuit. The data is stored in the display effect data storage area of 300 RAM. Thereby, the display effect corresponding to the display effect number specified by the command information stored in the display effect data storage area is executed (started).
On the other hand, if the process data corresponding to the value of the current production management timer includes command information for designating the start of the sound production (sound production number), the designation information is stored in the RAM of the production control circuit 300. Is stored in the sound production data storage area. As a result, the sound effect corresponding to the sound effect number specified by the command information stored in the sound effect data storage area is executed (started).
On the other hand, if the process data corresponding to the value of the current effect management timer includes command information for specifying the start of the lamp effect (lamp effect number), the specified information is stored in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Are stored in the lamp effect data storage area. Thereby, the lamp effect corresponding to the lamp effect number designated by the command information stored in the lamp effect data storage area is executed (started).
On the other hand, when the process data corresponding to the value of the current production management timer includes command information for designating the start of the movable body production (movable body production number), the designation information is used as the production control circuit 300. Are stored in the movable body effect data storage area of the RAM. Thereby, the movable body effect corresponding to the movable body effect number designated by the command information stored in the movable body effect data storage area is executed (started).

  In step S31-5, a register restoration process is executed, and the sub timer interrupt process is terminated. In the register restoration process, the register value saved in step S31-1 is restored.

Next, the command analysis process in step S31-3 will be described.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing.
When the command analysis process is executed in step S31-3, the process proceeds to step S32-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S32-1, a set value command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-2.
In the set value command reception process, it is determined whether or not a subcommand specifying a set value has been received. If it is determined that the subcommand specifying the setting value is received, the setting value specified by the subcommand is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
In step S32-2, a game state command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-3.
In the gaming state command reception process, it is determined whether or not a gaming state designation command has been received. And when it determines with having received the game state designation | designated command, the setting of various effect flags is performed.
In step S32-3, a hold command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-4. The hold command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-4, prefetch command reception processing is executed, and the flow proceeds to step S32-5. The prefetch command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-5, a variable command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-6. The variable command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-6, stop command reception processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (step S31-4). The stop command reception process will be described later.

Next, the hold command reception process in step S32-3 will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a hold command reception process.
When the hold command receiving process is executed in step S32-3, the process proceeds to step S36-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S36-1, it is determined whether or not a hold number designation command has been received. If it is determined that a hold number designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-2, and the hold number designation command is changed. If it is determined that it has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In step S36-2, it is determined whether or not the hold number designation command designates an increase in the hold number (that the hold number has increased by “1”), and the hold number designation command designates an increase in the hold number. If it is determined that there is (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-3, and the hold number designation command does not designate an increase in the hold number (designates that the hold number has decreased by “1”). When it determines (No), it transfers to step S36-4.

In step S36-3, the number-of-holds addition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S36-4.
In the hold number addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the hold number designation command specifies an increase in the special figure 1 hold number.
If it is determined that the hold number designation command specifies an increase in the special figure 1 hold number, a value obtained by adding “1” to the value set in the special figure 1 hold number counter is newly set. Special figure 1 Set to the number of hold counter. In addition, a normal hold effect corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special figure 1 start information is set.
For this, the effect control data corresponding to the normal hold effect is read, and the read effect control data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. At this time, as a display area for displaying the reserved symbol h, a storage unit (first storage unit) in which newly acquired special figure 1 start information is stored among the four display positions included in the reserved symbol display region b2. Display position corresponding to .about.fourth storage unit) is set. Here, the memory | storage part (1st memory | storage part-4th memory | storage part) in which the newly acquired special figure 1 starting information is memorize | stored is determined based on the value of a special figure 1 hold | maintenance number counter.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the hold number designation command specifies an increase in the special figure 2 hold number, a value obtained by adding “1” to the value set in the special figure 2 hold number counter is newly set. Special figure 2 Set to the number-of-holds counter. In addition, a normal hold effect corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special figure 2 start information is set.
For this, the effect control data corresponding to the normal hold effect is read, and the read effect control data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. At this time, as a display area for displaying the reserved symbol h, a storage unit (first storage unit) in which newly acquired special figure 2 start information is stored among the four display positions included in the reserved symbol display region b3. Display position corresponding to .about.fourth storage unit) is set. Here, the memory | storage part (1st memory | storage part-4th memory | storage part) in which the newly acquired special figure 2 starting information is memorize | stored is determined based on the value of a special figure 2 reservation number counter.

In step S36-4, the number-of-holds subtraction process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the hold number subtraction process, first, it is determined whether or not the hold number designation command specifies subtraction of the special figure 1 hold number.
If it is determined that the special figure 1 hold number subtraction is specified by the hold number designation command, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the special figure 1 hold number counter is newly set. Special figure 1 Set to the number of hold counter. Further, the display position of each reserved symbol h displayed in the reserved symbol display area b2 is changed (shifted).
Specifically, the holding effect corresponding to the holding symbol h displayed in the holding symbol display area b1 is terminated. Thereby, the display of the hold symbol h corresponding to the ended hold effect is ended.
Further, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display position of the reserved symbol h is set to the reserved symbol display area b2 (in the first storage unit). The corresponding display position is changed (shifted) to the reserved symbol display area b1.
In addition, when the hold symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the second storage unit in the hold symbol display area b2, the display position of the hold symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the second storage unit to the second display unit b2. Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to one storage unit.
Further, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the third storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the third storage unit to the second display unit b2. 2 Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to the storage unit.
In addition, when the holding symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the fourth storage unit in the holding symbol display area b2, the display position of the holding symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the fourth storage unit to the second display unit b2. 2 Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to the storage unit.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the hold number designation command specifies subtraction of the special figure 2 hold number, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the special figure 2 hold number counter is newly set. Special figure 2 Set to the number of hold counter In addition, the display position of each reserved symbol h displayed in the reserved symbol display area b3 is changed (shifted).
Specifically, the holding effect corresponding to the holding symbol h displayed in the holding symbol display area b1 is terminated. Thereby, the display of the hold symbol h corresponding to the ended hold effect is ended.
In addition, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b3, the display position of the reserved symbol h is set to the reserved symbol display area b3 (in the first storage unit). The corresponding display position is changed (shifted) to the reserved symbol display area b1.
In addition, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the second storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b3, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the second storage unit to the second display unit b3. Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to one storage unit.
In addition, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the third storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b3, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the third storage unit to the second display unit b3. 2 Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to the storage unit.
In addition, when the holding symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the fourth storage unit in the holding symbol display area b3, the display position of the holding symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the fourth storage unit to the second display unit b3. 2 Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to the storage unit.

Next, the prefetch command reception process in step S32-4 will be described.
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing prefetch command reception processing.
When the prefetch command reception process is executed in step S32-4, the process proceeds to step S33-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S33-1, it is determined whether or not a prefetch designation command (first prefetch designation command, second prefetch designation command and third prefetch designation command) has been received, and if it is determined that a prefetch designation command has been received (Yes) ), The process proceeds to step S33-2, and if it is determined that the prefetch designation command has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In step S33-2, a prefetch information analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-3. In the prefetch information analysis process, information designated by the prefetch designation command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 as the hold information.
In the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, a hold information storage area capable of storing hold information is set. In addition, as a reserved information storage area, a first reserved information storage area corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (Special Figure 1 start information storage area of the RAM 230) and a second special symbol lottery (Special Figure 2 start information storage area of the RAM 230). ) Corresponding to the second hold information storage area.
The first hold information storage area includes a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit as a storage unit capable of storing the hold information. In the first hold information storage area, hold information corresponding to the special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area is stored. That is, the hold information stored in the first storage unit of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 start information stored in the first storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the second storage unit of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 start information stored in the second storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the third storage unit of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 start information stored in the third storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the fourth storage unit of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 start information stored in the fourth storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area.
The second hold information storage area includes a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit as a storage unit capable of storing the hold information. In the second hold information storage area, hold information corresponding to the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area is stored. That is, the hold information stored in the first storage unit of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 start information stored in the first storage unit of the special figure 2 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the second storage unit of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 start information stored in the second storage unit of the special figure 2 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the third storage unit of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 start information stored in the third storage unit of the special figure 2 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the fourth storage section of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 start information stored in the fourth storage section of the special figure 2 start information storage area.
Each hold information includes symbol information indicating the type of stop symbol, first variation information indicating the content of the variation mode (“variation mode number” or “undefined value”), and the content of the variation pattern (“variation pattern number” or Second variation information indicating “indefinite value”).

In the prefetch information analysis process, first, it is determined whether or not the received first prefetch designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery.
When it is determined that the received first prefetching designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery, the type of stop symbol designated by the first prefetching designation command (“missing symbol” or “hit p symbol” )), The contents of the fluctuation mode designated by the second prefetch designation command ("fluctuation mode m" or "undefined value"), and the contents of the fluctuation pattern designated by the third prefetch designation command ("fluctuation pattern n" or " Indefinite value "), the symbol information corresponding to the analyzed stop symbol type, the first variation information corresponding to the analyzed variation mode content, and the second corresponding to the analyzed variation pattern content Hold information including fluctuation information is generated. Then, the generated hold information is stored (saved) in the first hold information storage area.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the received first prefetching designation command corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the type of stop symbol designated by the first prefetching designation command (“missing symbol” or “hit p symbol” )), The contents of the fluctuation mode designated by the second prefetch designation command ("fluctuation mode m" or "undefined value"), and the contents of the fluctuation pattern designated by the third prefetch designation command ("fluctuation pattern n" or " Indefinite value "), the symbol information corresponding to the analyzed stop symbol type, the first variation information corresponding to the analyzed variation mode content, and the second corresponding to the analyzed variation pattern content Hold information including fluctuation information is generated. Then, the generated hold information is stored (saved) in the second hold information storage area.
In the following description, the hold information stored in the hold information storage area in step S33-2 is referred to as “prefetch target hold information”. Further, among the hold information stored in the first hold information storage area, the hold information for which notification display (variable display and stop display) is executed before the prefetch target hold information is referred to as “preceding hold information”.

In step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the prefetching notice effect is being executed. If it is determined that the prefetching notice effect is not being executed (No), the process proceeds to step S33-4 and the prefetching notice effect is displayed. If it is determined that the process is being executed (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In the present embodiment, “1” is set in the prefetching notice effect flag area in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 during execution of the prefetching notice effect. Therefore, in step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the prefetching notice effect is being executed based on whether or not “1” is set in the prefetching notice effect flag area in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. .
In step S33-4, it is determined whether or not the prefetching notice effect execution condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the prefetching notice effect execution condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-5, and the prefetching notice effect execution condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the condition is not satisfied (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In the present embodiment, (1) the prefetch target hold information is the hold information corresponding to the special figure 1 start information, and (2) the predecessor hold information of a predetermined number (“2” in the present embodiment) or more is stored. (3) No preceding hold information indicating the type (variation pattern number) belonging to “normal reach fluctuation” or “super reach fluctuation” as the type of fluctuation pattern, and (4) the time-saving control is stopped. It is determined that the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied when all conditions of (5) that the big hit gaming state is not occurring are satisfied.
Note that the contents of the pre-reading notice effect execution condition can be changed as appropriate. In other words, not all of the above conditions (1) to (5) but a condition in which it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied when one or more of the above conditions (1) to (5) are satisfied. It doesn't matter. Further, as the pre-reading notice effect execution condition, other conditions different from the above conditions (1) to (5) may be included.

In step S33-5, a pre-reading notice effect lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-6. In the prefetching notice effect lottery process, a prefetching notice effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the prefetch notice effect is executed.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a prefetching notice effect lottery table in which the winning value of the prefetching notice effect lottery is registered.
In the prefetching notice effect lottery process, first, a prefetching notice effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Then, based on the acquired prefetching notice effect lottery random number and the prefetching notice effect lottery table, it is determined whether to execute the prefetching notice effect.
In step S33-6, it is determined whether or not the prefetching notice effect lottery executed in step S33-5 has been won. If it is determined that the prefetching notice effect lottery has been won (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-7. If it is determined that it has been lost in the pre-reading notice effect lottery (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In step 33-7, a pre-reading notice effect setting process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5). In the prefetching notice effect setting process, the contents of the prefetching notice effect (holding notice effect) are set.
Specifically, in the pre-reading notice effect setting process, first, a hold notice effect setting process is executed. In the hold notice effect intensity setting process, the effect intensity of the hold notice effect is set.
In the present embodiment, “holding notice strength 1”, “holding notice strength 2”, “holding notice strength 3”, and “holding notice strength 4” are defined as the presentation strength of the hold notice effect. .
Then, the expectation level of each effect strength is, in descending order of expectation, “holding notice strength 4”, “holding notice strength 3”, “holding notice strength 2”, “holding notice strength 1” (high expectation → (Expectation is low).
In the ROM of the effect control circuit 300, a reserved notice effect lottery table in which the correspondence between the effect intensity lottery random number and the effect intensity of the hold notice effect ("hold notice intensity 4" to "hold notice intensity 1") is registered. Is stored.
In addition, a pending notice effect strength lottery table corresponding to each combination of the variation mode type, the variation pattern type, and the stop symbol type is stored as the pending notice effect strength lottery table.
In the hold notice effect intensity setting process, first, an effect intensity lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Also, check the type of the fluctuation mode indicated by the prefetch target hold information, the type of the variation pattern indicated by the prefetch target hold information, and the type of the stop symbol indicated by the prefetch target hold information. Read the notice effect strength lottery table. And based on the acquired effect intensity | strength lottery random number and the read hold notice effect intensity | strength lottery table, the effect intensity | strength of a hold notice effect is determined (determination).
In the pre-reading notice effect setting process, when the effect intensity of the pending notice effect is determined, the process proceeds to the final color setting process.

In the final color setting process, the final color is set.
In the following description, the hold symbol h corresponding to the prefetch target hold information is referred to as “prefetch target hold symbol”.
The “final color” refers to the color of the pre-read target reserved symbol that finally changes in the reservation notice effect.
In this embodiment, when “holding notice strength 4” is determined as the effect intensity of the holding notice effect, “gold” is determined (determined) as the final color.
On the other hand, when “holding notice strength 3” is determined as the effect intensity of the holding notice effect, “red” is determined (determined) as the final color.
On the other hand, when “holding notice strength 2” is determined as the effect intensity of the holding notice effect, “green” is determined (determined) as the final color.
On the other hand, when “holding notice strength 1” is determined as the effect intensity of the holding notice effect, “blue” is determined (determined) as the final color.
In the pre-reading notice effect setting process, when the final color is determined, the process proceeds to the hold change trigger setting process.
Here, it is possible to adopt a configuration that suggests a set value depending on the mode of the hold notice effect.
Specifically, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a color corresponding to a set value may be selected as the final color.
That is, as the color (type) of the reserved symbol h, in addition to “white”, “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “gold”, a special color (for example, “rainbow color”) is defined. Then, the final color is determined in consideration of the set value stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
For example, when “holding notice strength 4” is determined as the effect strength of the hold notice effect, and the set value = “6” or “5” stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 is set. One of the “gold” and “rainbow” colors is determined as the final color. At this time, one of “gold color” and “rainbow color” is determined by lottery.
When “holding notice strength 3” to “holding notice strength 1” are determined as the effect intensity of the hold notice effect, “rainbow color” is not determined as the final color. Further, when the set value = “4” to “1” stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, “rainbow color” is not determined as the final color.
Thus, the set value can be suggested by the mode of the hold notice effect (the color of the hold symbol h).

In the hold change trigger setting process, a hold change trigger is set.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a pending change opportunity lottery table in which correspondences between pending change opportunity lottery random numbers and combinations of pending change timings are registered.
In addition, a hold change opportunity lottery table corresponding to each combination of the special figure 1 hold number ("3" or "4"), the variation mode type, and the final color is stored as the hold change opportunity lottery table. ing.
In the hold change opportunity lottery table corresponding to the case where the type of change mode indicated by the prefetch target hold information is “fluctuation without pseudo-continuous”, when the prefetch target hold information is acquired (stored) as a combination of hold change triggers, A combination including at least one hold change opportunity is registered among the start of the fluctuating effect related to the preceding hold information and the start of the fluctuating effect related to the prefetch target hold information.
On the other hand, in the hold change opportunity lottery table corresponding to the case where the type of change mode indicated by the prefetch target hold information is “pseudo-continuous 2 change” to “pseudo-continuous 4 change”, the prefetch target hold is set as a combination of hold change triggers. At the time of information acquisition (at the time of storage), at the start of a variation effect related to each preceding hold information, at the start of a variation effect related to the prefetch target hold information, and each pseudo change effect included in the change effect related to the prefetch target hold information A combination including at least one hold change opportunity is registered at the end of each pseudo-change effect included in the change effect related to the pre-read target hold information.
In the hold change opportunity setting process, first, a hold change opportunity lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Also, the special figure 1 hold count, the type of variation mode indicated by the prefetch target hold information, and the final color determined in the final color setting process are checked, and a hold change opportunity lottery table corresponding to this check result is displayed. read out. Then, based on the acquired on-hold change opportunity lottery random number and the read on-hold change opportunity lottery table, a combination of on-hold change opportunity lots is determined (determined). Then, according to the determined combination of hold change triggers, one or more hold change triggers related to the hold notice effect are set.
In the pre-reading notice effect setting process, when a hold change opportunity is set, the process proceeds to a hold change content setting process.

In the hold change content setting process, the hold change content corresponding to each hold change opportunity is set.
Specifically, in the pending change content setting process, as the pending change content, the color of the prefetch target hold before the change and the color of the prefetch target hold symbol after the change are set.
In the present embodiment, among one or more hold change triggers set in the hold change trigger setting process, each hold change trigger is assigned to each hold in turn, starting with the subsequent hold change trigger (later hold change trigger). The corresponding pending change content is determined.
For example, when the hold change trigger is set three times in the hold change trigger setting process, each time in the order of the third hold change trigger, the second hold change trigger, and the first hold change trigger. The pending change content corresponding to the pending change opportunity is determined.
Also, when determining the hold change content corresponding to each hold change opportunity, the color of the pre-read target hold symbol after the change is first determined, and then the color of the pre-read target hold symbol before the change is determined. The At this time, as the color of the prefetch target reserved symbol before the change, a color having a low expectation is determined as compared with the color of the prefetch target reserved symbol after the change. As a result, the color of the pre-read target reserved symbol is changed (promoted) to a color with a high degree of expectation in accordance with the arrival of each hold change opportunity.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a pending change content lottery table in which correspondences between the pending change content lottery random numbers and the color of the prefetch target pending symbol before the change are registered.
In addition, as the pending change content lottery table, a pending change content lottery table corresponding to each color of the reserved symbol h (the color of the pre-read target reserved symbol after the change) is stored.
Then, in the reserved change content lottery table corresponding to each color of the reserved symbol h (the color of the pre-read target reserved symbol after the change), the color of the pre-read target reserved symbol after the change is compared with the color of the pre-read target reserved symbol after the change. Only colors with low expectation are registered.
In the hold change content setting process, first, the hold change content is determined for the last hold change trigger among the hold change triggers set in the hold change trigger setting process. For this purpose, first, the color of the pre-read target reserved symbol after the change related to the last change change opportunity is determined. At this time, the final color determined in the final color setting process is determined as the color of the pre-read target reserved symbol after the change related to the final hold change opportunity. Next, the color of the pre-read target reserved symbol before the change related to the last change change trigger is determined. For this purpose, first, a pending change content lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the holding change content lottery table corresponding to the color of the pre-read target holding symbol after the change determined for the last holding change opportunity is read. Then, based on the acquired reserved change content lottery random number and the read reserved change content lottery table, the color of the pre-read target reserved symbol before the change related to the final hold change opportunity is determined.
In the hold change content setting process, next, the hold change contents are determined for each hold change trigger except the last hold change trigger among the hold change triggers set in the hold change trigger setting process. At this time, the hold change content corresponding to each hold change trigger is determined in order from the hold change trigger that comes later.
In order to determine the hold change content corresponding to each hold change trigger, first, the color of the pre-read target hold symbol after the change related to the hold change trigger is determined. At this time, the color of the pre-read target reserved symbol before the change determined for the next hold change trigger is determined as the color of the pre-read target hold symbol after the change related to the current hold change trigger. Next, the color of the prefetch target reserved symbol before the change related to the current hold change opportunity is determined. For this purpose, first, a pending change content lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the holding change content lottery table corresponding to the color of the pre-read target holding symbol after the change determined for the current holding change opportunity is read. Then, based on the acquired reserved change content lottery random number and the read reserved change content lottery table, the color of the pre-read target reserved symbol before the change related to the current hold change opportunity is determined.
In the hold change content setting process, the hold change content determined for each hold change trigger is set in association with the hold change trigger. As a result, according to the arrival of each hold change opportunity, the color of the prefetch target hold symbol is changed (promoted) in accordance with the hold change content set for the hold change trigger.

In the pre-reading notice effect setting process, next, “1” is set in the pre-reading notice effect flag area in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
As described above, the hold notice effect is started in response to the arrival of the first hold change opportunity.
Note that “0” is set in the pre-reading notice effect flag area in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 in accordance with the end of the hold notice effect by a process not shown.

Next, the variable command reception process in step S32-5 will be described.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variable command reception process.
When the variable command reception process is executed in step S32-5, the process proceeds to step S34-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S34-1, it is determined whether a predetermined control command has been received. If it is determined that the predetermined control command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S34-2, and the predetermined control command is changed. If it is determined that it has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6).
Here, the predetermined control commands are a symbol type designation command, a variation mode designation command, and a variation pattern designation command.
In step S34-2, a stop effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-3. In the stop effect determination process, a stop effect mode (stop effect number) is determined.
Specifically, in the stop effect determination process, the stop effect mode (stop effect number) is determined based on the stop symbol type specified by the symbol type specifying command. Then, the determined stop production number is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the production control circuit 300.
Here, the setting value may be suggested depending on the mode of the stop effect.
Specifically, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a mode according to a set value may be selected as a mode of the stop effect.
That is, the normal effect symbol and the special effect symbol are defined as the mode (type) of the first effect symbol z1. And the setting value preserve | saved in the predetermined area | region of RAM of the production | presentation control circuit 300 is considered, and the aspect of the 1st production symbol z1 stopped and displayed in a stop production | presentation is determined.
For example, when the set value = “6” or “5” stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 is set as the effect symbol z1 to be stopped and displayed in the stop effect, the normal effect symbol and the special effect symbol It is set as the structure by which one aspect is determined among effect designs. At this time, one of the normal effect design and the special effect design is determined by lottery.
When the set value stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 = “4” to “1”, the special effect symbol is used as the aspect of the first effect symbol z1 that is stopped and displayed in the stop effect. Is never determined.
Thereby, it becomes possible to suggest a set value by the aspect of the 1st production design z1 stopped and displayed in a stop production.

In step S34-3, a variation effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-4. In the variation effect determination process, a variation effect mode (variation effect number) is determined.
Specifically, in the variation effect determination process, first, a first variation effect determination process for determining the mode (variation effect number) of the first variation effect is executed.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a first variation effect lottery table in which the correspondence between the variation mode type (variation mode number) and the first variation effect mode (variation effect number) is registered. .
In the first variation effect determination process, first, the first variation effect lottery table is read. The first variation effect corresponding to the variation mode type (variation mode number) designated by the variation mode designation command among the first variation effect modes (variation effect numbers) registered in the first variation effect lottery table. The mode is determined (selected).

In the variation effect determination process, next, a second variation effect determination process for determining a mode (variation effect number) of the second variation effect is executed.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a second variation effect lottery table in which the correspondence between the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) and the second variation effect mode (variation effect number) is registered. .
In the second variation effect determination process, first, the second variation effect lottery table is read. The second variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) specified by the variation pattern designation command among the second variation effect modes (variation effect numbers) registered in the second variation effect lottery table. The mode is determined (selected).
At this time, when “super reach variation effect 1” is selected as the second variation effect mode, referring to the set value set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, “super reach variation The mode of “effect 1” is determined (selected).
Specifically, when the set value = “1”, “super reach variation effect 1A” is selected as the form of “super reach variation effect 1”. On the other hand, when the set value = “2”, “super reach variation effect 1B” is selected as the mode of “super reach variation effect 1”. On the other hand, when the set value = “3”, “super reach variation effect 1C” is selected as the mode of “super reach variation effect 1”. On the other hand, when the set value = “4”, “super reach variation effect 1D” is selected as the form of “super reach variation effect 1”. On the other hand, when the set value = “5”, “super reach fluctuation effect 1E” is selected as the mode of “super reach fluctuation effect 1”. On the other hand, when the set value = “6”, “super reach variation effect 1F” is selected as the mode of “super reach variation effect 1”.

In step S34-4, a notice effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-5. In the notice effect determining process, the main notice effect and the sub notice effect are determined.
As described above, in this embodiment, the slashing notice is executed as the main notice effect, and the character notice is executed as the sub notice effect.
In the notice effect determination process, first, the effect strength (whether or not to execute the slasher notice) is determined.
In the present embodiment, “sword-cutting notice strength 0” to “sword-cutting notice strength 5” are stipulated as the effect strength of the sword-cutting notice.
Then, when the “slashing notice strength 0” is determined as the effect strength of the slashing notice, the slashing notice is not executed. On the other hand, when “slashing notice strength 1” to “slashing notice strength 5” is determined as the effect strength of the slashing notice, the slashing notice is executed.
The expectation level of each production strength of the slashing advance notice is, in descending order of expectation, “slashing notice strength 5”, “slashing notice strength 4”, “slashing notice strength 3”, “slashing notice strength 2”, “slashing notice” It is defined to be “strength 1” (high expectation → low expectation).
In the ROM of the effect control circuit 300, there is an effect strength lottery table in which the effect strength lottery random numbers and the effect strengths of the effect of the slashing notice (“辻 slash advance notice strength 0” to “辻 slash advance notice strength 5”) are registered. Stored.
Also, as a slashing notice effect strength lottery table, it corresponds to a combination of the current game state ("special figure high probability state" or "special figure low probability state"), a variation pattern type, and a stop symbol type A slashing notice effect strength lottery table is stored.
In order to determine the effect intensity of the slashing notice, first, an effect intensity lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Also, the current gaming state ("special figure high probability state" or "special figure low probability state"), the type of fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command (fluctuation pattern number), and the stop symbol designation command designate The stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is confirmed, and the slashing notice effect strength lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, based on the acquired effect strength lottery random number and the read slashing notice effect strength lottery table, the slashing notice effect strength is determined (determined).

As the effect strength of the slashing notice, the type of the slashing notice is determined when any of the effect strengths of “Slashing notice strength 1” to “Sword cutting notice strength 5” is determined.
In the present embodiment, when the “slashing notice strength 1” is determined as the effect strength of the slashing notice, “slashing notice 1” is determined as the type of the slashing notice.
On the other hand, when “slashing advance notice strength 2” is determined as the effect strength of the slashing notice, “slashing notice 2” is determined as the type of slashing notice.
On the other hand, when “slashing notice level 3” is determined as the effect strength of the slashing notice, “slashing notice 3” is determined as the type of slashing notice.
On the other hand, when “slashing notice level 4” is determined as the effect strength of the slashing notice, “slashing notice 4” is determined as the type of slashing notice.
On the other hand, when the “slashing notice level 5” is determined as the effect strength of the slashing notice, “slashing notice 5” is determined as the type of slashing notice.
At this time, if “slashing advance notice 5” is selected as the type (mode) of the advance notice, the set value stored (stored) in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 is referred to, The mode of “Notice 5” is determined (selected).
Specifically, when the set value = “1”, “slash cutting notice 5A” is selected as the mode of “slash cutting notice 5”. On the other hand, when the set value = “2”, “slash cutting notice 5B” is selected as the mode of “slash cutting notice 5”. On the other hand, when the set value = “3”, “slash cutting notice 5C” is selected as the mode of “slash cutting notice 5”. On the other hand, when the set value = “4”, “slash cutting notice 5D” is selected as the mode of “slash cutting notice 5”. On the other hand, when the set value = “5”, “slash cutting notice 5E” is selected as the mode of “slash cutting notice 5”. On the other hand, when the set value = “6”, “slash cutting notice 5F” is selected as the mode of “slash cutting notice 5”.

In the notice effect determination process, next, the effect strength (whether or not to execute the sub notice) of the character notice (sub notice effect) is determined.
In the present embodiment, “Character notice strength 0” to “Character notice strength 5” are defined as the character notice effect intensity.
When “character notice strength 0” is determined as the character notice effect intensity, the character notice is not executed. On the other hand, when “Character Notice Strength 1” to “Character Notice Strength 5” is determined as the effect strength of the character notice, the character notice is executed.
The expectation level of each effect strength of the character notice is, in descending order of expectation, “character notice strength 5”, “character notice strength 4”, “character notice strength 3”, “character notice strength 2”, “character notice” The strength is defined to be 1 ”(high expectation → low expectation).
In the ROM of the effect control circuit 300, there is a character notice effect drawing lottery table in which the correspondence between the effect strength lottery random number and the character notice effect intensity ("character notice strength 0" to "character notice strength 5") is registered. Stored.
In addition, a character notice effect strength lottery table corresponding to a combination of a variation pattern type and a stop symbol type is stored as a character notice effect strength lottery table.
In order to determine the effect strength of the character notice, first, the effect strength lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Also, check the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) specified by the variation pattern specification command and the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number) specified by the stop symbol specification command, and the character corresponding to this confirmation result Read the notice effect strength lottery table. Then, based on the obtained effect strength lottery random number and the read character notice effect strength lottery table, the effect strength of the character notice is determined (determined).

When any one of “character notice strength 1” to “character notice strength 5” is determined as the character notice effect intensity, the type of character notice is determined.
In this embodiment, when “character notice strength 1” is determined as the character notice effect intensity, “character notice 1” is determined as the character notice type.
On the other hand, when “character notice strength 2” is determined as the character notice effect intensity, “character notice 2” is decided as the character notice type.
On the other hand, when “character notice strength 3” is determined as the character notice effect intensity, “character notice 3” is determined as the character notice type.
On the other hand, when “character notice strength 4” is determined as the character notice effect intensity, “character notice 4” is decided as the character notice type.
On the other hand, when “character notice strength 5” is determined as the character notice effect intensity, “character notice 5” is determined as the character notice type.

In step S34-5, a variation effect setting process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6). In the variation effect setting process, the effect control data for the variation effect is set.
Specifically, in the variation effect setting process, the effect control data corresponding to the first variation effect mode (variation effect number) determined in step S34-3 and the second variation effect mode determined in step S34-3. Production control data corresponding to (variation production number) is read out.
Next, the read effect control data is synthesized to generate effect control data related to the changing effect. Then, the generated effect control data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Thereby, the fluctuating effect is started.
Also, in step S34-4, when “slashing notice level 1” to “slashing notice level 5” is determined as the effect strength of the slashing notice (when the slashing notice is executed), in step S34-4. The effect control data corresponding to the determined type of slashing notice is read out. Then, the read effect control data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Thus, the slashing notice is started at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variation effect.
Further, when “character notice strength 1” to “character notice strength 5” are determined as the character notice effect intensity in step S34-4 (when the character notice intensity is executed), in step S34-4. The effect control data corresponding to the determined character notice type is read out. Then, the read effect control data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the character notice is started at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variation effect.

Next, stop command reception processing in step S32-6 will be described.
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing stop command reception processing.
When the stop command reception process is executed in step S32-6, as shown in FIG. 39, the process proceeds to step S35-1.
In step S35-1, it is determined whether or not a stop designation command has been received. If it is determined that a stop designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S35-2 and the stop designation command has been received. If it is determined that there is not (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7).
In step S35-2, a stop effect setting process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7). In the stop effect setting process, stop control effect control data is set.
Specifically, in the stop effect setting process, effect control data corresponding to the stop effect number determined in step S34-2 is read. Then, the read effect control data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Thereby, a stop effect is started.
Here, in the stop effect, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol that were temporarily stopped at the end of the variation effect are stopped and displayed.

(Operation of pachinko machine 1)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, when “super reach variation 1” is selected as the variation pattern type, “super reach variation effect 1” is executed as the second variation effect. And the setting value is suggested by the aspect of the lamp effect included in the “super reach fluctuation effect 1”.
Specifically, “Super Reach Variation 1” is selected as the type of variation pattern, and when the set value = “1”, “Super Reach Variation Effect 1A” is selected as the mode of the second variation effect. . In “super reach variation effect 1A”, “super reach 1 lamp effect A” is executed as the lamp effect (lamp effect number).
On the other hand, when “super reach variation 1” is selected as the type of variation pattern and the set value = “2”, “super reach variation effect 1B” is selected as the mode of the second variation effect. In “super reach fluctuation effect 1B”, “super reach 1 lamp effect B” is executed as the lamp effect (lamp effect number).
On the other hand, when “super reach variation 1” is selected as the variation pattern type and the set value = “3”, “super reach variation effect 1C” is selected as the mode of the second variation effect. In “super reach fluctuation effect 1C”, “super reach 1 lamp effect C” is executed as the lamp effect (lamp effect number).
On the other hand, when “super reach variation 1” is selected as the type of variation pattern and the set value = “4”, “super reach variation effect 1D” is selected as the mode of the second variation effect. In “super reach fluctuation effect 1D”, “super reach 1 lamp effect D” is executed as the lamp effect (lamp effect number).
On the other hand, when “super reach variation 1” is selected as the type of variation pattern and the set value = “5”, “super reach variation effect 1E” is selected as the mode of the second variation effect. In “super reach fluctuation effect 1E”, “super reach 1 lamp effect E” is executed as the lamp effect (lamp effect number).
On the other hand, when “super reach variation 1” is selected as the variation pattern type and the set value = “6”, “super reach variation effect 1F” is selected as the second variation effect mode. In “super reach fluctuation effect 1F”, “super reach 1 lamp effect F” is executed as the lamp effect (lamp effect number).

In “Super Reach 1 Lamp Effect A” to “Super Reach 1 Lamp Effect F”, the light emitting elements included in the panel lamp 21 emit light (light on) in the same pattern. In “Super Reach 1 Lamp Effect A” to “Super Reach 1 Lamp Effect F”, the first specific light emitting element emits light with a different color when a predetermined opportunity occurs (for example, when a reach state is formed). The
At this time, in the “super reach 1 lamp effect A”, the first specific light emitting element emits “white” light. On the other hand, in the “super reach 1 lamp effect B”, the first specific light emitting element emits “blue” light. On the other hand, in the “super reach 1 lamp effect C”, the first specific light emitting element emits “green” light. On the other hand, in the “super reach 1 lamp effect D”, the first specific light emitting element emits “red” light. On the other hand, in the “super reach 1 lamp production E”, the first specific light emitting element emits “gold”. On the other hand, in “Super Reach 1 Lamp Effect F”, the first specific light emitting element emits “rainbow (multicolor)”.
As a result, in the “super reach variation effect 1”, the set value is suggested by the color (light emission color) of the first specific light emitting element that emits light when a predetermined trigger occurs.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when the “sword-cutting notice strength 5” is selected as the effect intensity of the main notice effect (sword-cutting notice), “sword-cutting notice 5” is executed. Then, the setting value is suggested by the aspect (contents) of the lamp effect included in “Scarlet notice 5”.
Specifically, “slashing advance notice strength 5” is selected as the effect strength of slashing notice, and when the setting value = “1”, “slashing notice 5A” is selected as the aspect of slashing notice. In the “slash cutting notice 5A”, the “slash cutting notice 5 lamp effect A” is executed in response to the detection of the pressing operation of the effect button 5b during the setting of the operation valid state.
On the other hand, when the setting strength = “2” is selected as the effect strength of the slashing advance notice, “辻 slash advance notice 5B” is selected as the aspect of the slashing advance notice. In the “slash cutting notice 5B”, the “slash cutting notice 5 lamp effect B” is executed in response to the detection of the pressing operation of the effect button 5b during the setting of the operation valid state.
On the other hand, when the setting strength = “3” is selected as the effect strength of the slashing advance notice, and when the setting value = “3”, the “slashing advance notice 5C” is selected as the aspect of the slashing advance notice. In the “slashing advance notice 5C”, the “slashing advance notice 5 lamp effect C” is executed in response to the detection of the pressing operation of the effect button 5b during the setting of the operation valid state.
On the other hand, when the setting strength = “4” is selected as the effect strength of the slashing advance notice, “辻 slash advance notice 5D” is selected as the aspect of the slashing advance notice. In the “slash cutting notice 5D”, the “slash cutting notice 5 lamp effect D” is executed in response to the detection of the pressing operation of the effect button 5b during the setting of the operation valid state.
On the other hand, when the setting strength = “5” is selected as the effect strength of the slashing advance notice, and when the setting value = “5”, the “slashing advance notice 5E” is selected as the aspect of the slashing advance notice. In the “slashing advance notice 5E”, the “slashing advance notice 5 lamp effect E” is executed in response to the detection of the pressing operation of the effect button 5b during the setting of the operation valid state.
On the other hand, when the setting strength = “6” is selected as the effect strength of the slashing advance notice, and when the setting value = “6”, the “slashing advance notice 5F” is selected as the aspect of the slashing advance notice. In the “slash cutting notice 5F”, the “slash cutting notice 5 lamp effect F” is executed in response to the detection of the pressing operation of the effect button 5b during the setting of the operation valid state.

In “Tsubakiri notice 5 lamp presentation A” to “Tsubakiri notice 5 lamp presentation F”, the light emitting elements included in the button lamps are lit (lighted) in a predetermined pattern. Further, in “Tsubakiri notice 5 lamp production A” to “Tsubakiri notice 5 lamp production F”, the light emitting color and the number of times of light emission of the light emitting elements included in the button lamp are different from each other.
At this time, in the “slashing notice 5 lamp effect A”, the light emitting element included in the button lamp emits light 1 [time], and “white” is emitted in each light emission. On the other hand, in the “slashing notice 5 lamp effect B”, the light-emitting elements included in the button lamps emit 2 [times] at predetermined intervals, and “blue” is emitted in each emission. On the other hand, in the “butterfly cutting 5 lamp effect C”, the light-emitting elements included in the button lamps emit 3 [times] at predetermined intervals, and “green” is emitted in each light emission. On the other hand, in the “slashing notice 5 lamp effect D”, the light-emitting elements included in the button lamps emit light 4 [times] at predetermined intervals, and “red” is emitted in each light emission. On the other hand, in the “slashing notice 5 lamp effect E”, the light emitting elements included in the button lamps emit 5 [times] at predetermined intervals, and “golden” is emitted in each light emission. On the other hand, in the “slashing notice 5 lamp effect F”, the light emitting elements included in the button lamps emit light 6 [times] at a predetermined interval, and light is emitted in a color different from the previous light emission in each light emission.
As a result, in “Scarlet notice 5”, the set value is suggested by the light emission color and the number of light emission of the light emitting element included in the effect button.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when one of “big hit 6” and “big hit 7” is won, “big hit effect 6” is executed as the big hit effect. And the setting value is suggested by the mode (contents) of the lamp effect included in the “big hit effect 6”.
Specifically, when one of “big hit 6” and “big hit 7” is won and the set value = “1”, “big hit effect 6A” is selected as the mode of the big hit effect. In the “big hit effect 6A”, the “big hit 6 lamp effect A” is executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity (for example, the start of the final round game and the start of the ending period).
On the other hand, when one of “big hit 6” and “big hit 7” is won and the set value = “2”, “big hit effect 6B” is selected as the mode of the big hit effect. In the “big hit effect 6B”, the “big hit 6 lamp effect B” is executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity (for example, the start of the final round game, the start of the ending period).
On the other hand, when one of “big hit 6” and “big hit 7” is won and the set value = “3”, “big hit effect 6C” is selected as the mode of the big hit effect. In the “big hit effect 6C”, the “big hit 6 lamp effect C” is executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity (for example, the start of the final round game and the start of the ending period).
On the other hand, when one of “big hit 6” and “big hit 7” is won and the set value = “4”, “big hit effect 6D” is selected as the mode of the big hit effect. In the “big hit effect 6D”, the “big hit 6 lamp effect D” is executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity (for example, the start of the final round game and the start of the ending period).
On the other hand, when one of “big hit 6” and “big hit 7” is won and the set value = “5”, “big hit effect 6E” is selected as the mode of the big hit effect. In the “big hit effect 6E”, the “big hit 6 lamp effect E” is executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity (for example, the start of the final round game, the start of the ending period).
On the other hand, when one of “big hit 6” and “big hit 7” is won and the set value = “6”, “big hit effect 6F” is selected as the mode of the big hit effect. In the “big hit effect 6F”, the “big hit 6 lamp effect F” is executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity (for example, the start of the final round game, the start of the ending period).

In “big hit 6 lamp production A” to “big hit 6 lamp production F”, among the six second specific light emitting elements, a predetermined number of light emitting elements emit light (light on) in a predetermined pattern. And in "big hit 6 lamp production A"-"big hit 6 lamp production F", the number of the 2nd specific light emitting elements light-emitted by a predetermined pattern mutually differs.
At this time, in the “big hit 6 lamp production A”, one second specific light emitting element among the six second specific light emitting elements emits light in a predetermined pattern. On the other hand, in the “big hit 6 lamp production B”, of the six second specific light emitting elements, two second specific light emitting elements emit light in a predetermined pattern. On the other hand, in the “big hit 6 lamp effect C”, among the six second specific light emitting elements, three second specific light emitting elements emit light in a predetermined pattern. On the other hand, in the “big hit 6 lamp production D”, of the six second specific light emitting elements, four second specific light emitting elements emit light in a predetermined pattern. On the other hand, in the “big hit 6 lamp effect E”, among the 6 second specific light emitting elements, 5 second specific light emitting elements emit light in a predetermined pattern. On the other hand, in the “big hit 6 lamp effect F”, all of the six second specific light emitting elements emit light in a predetermined pattern.
Thus, in “big hit effect 6”, a set value is suggested by the number of second specific light emitting elements that emit light.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, a demonstration effect is executed in response to the start of the standby state. And the setting value is suggested by the mode (contents) of the lamp effect included in the demonstration effect.
Specifically, when the set value = “1” to “3”, “demonstration effect A1” or “demonstration effect A2” is selected as a demonstration effect mode. In “demonstration effect A1”, “demo lamp effect A1” is executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity (for example, when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the demonstration effect). Further, in the “demonstration effect A2”, the “demo lamp effect A2” is executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity (for example, when the second predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the demonstration effect).
On the other hand, when the set value = “4” to “6”, “Demo effect B1” or “Demo effect B2” is selected as the demonstration effect mode. In the “demonstration effect B1”, the “demo lamp effect B1” is executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity (for example, when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the demonstration effect). Further, in the “demonstration effect B2”, the “demo lamp effect B2” is executed in response to the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity (for example, when the second predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the demonstration effect).

In “Demo lamp effect A1” and “Demo lamp effect B1”, the third light emitting element (the third light emitting element A and the third light emitting element B) emits light (lights up) in a predetermined pattern in response to the start. In the “demonstration lamp effect A1” and the “demo lamp effect B1”, the third light emitting elements (the third light emitting element A and the third light emitting element B) emit light (light on) with different patterns.
At this time, in the “demonstration lamp effect A1,” the third light emitting elements are sequentially arranged in the order of the third light emitting element A, the third light emitting element B, the third light emitting element B, and the third light emitting element A according to the start thereof. Is emitted. On the other hand, in the “demonstration lamp effect B1”, the third light emitting elements are sequentially arranged in the order of the third light emitting element B, the third light emitting element A, the third light emitting element A, and the third light emitting element B according to the start thereof. Emits light.
As a result, in the demonstration effects (“Demo Lamp Effect A1” and “Demo Lamp Effect B1”), the set value is suggested by the light emission pattern of the third specific light emitting element.

In “demonstration effect A2” and “demonstration effect B2”, a predetermined character image is displayed on the display screen 31a as a predetermined time elapses from the start.
In the “demonstration lamp effect A2”, the third light emitting element A emits light when a predetermined character image is displayed on the display screen 31a.
On the other hand, in the “demonstration lamp effect B2”, the third light emitting element A does not emit light when a predetermined character image is displayed on the display screen 31a.
As a result, in the demonstration effects (“Demo Lamp Effect A2” and “Demo Lamp Effect B2”), a set value is suggested depending on whether or not the third specific light emitting element A emits light when a predetermined character image is displayed. The

(Operation of pachinko machine 1)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, the lamp effect (the lamp effect included in the “super reach variation effect 1”, the lamp effect included in the “slashing notice 5”, the lamp effect included in the “hit hit effect 6”, and the lamp effect included in the demonstration effect) And the like according to the set values ("Super Reach 1 Lamp Effect A" to "Super Reach 1 Lamp Effect F", "Slash Cutting Notice 5 Lamp Effect A" to "Sword Kill Notice 5 Lamp Effect F", ""Big hit 6 lamp effect A" to "Big hit 6 lamp effect F", "Demo lamp effect A1", "Demo lamp effect A2", "Demo lamp effect B1", "Demo lamp effect B2", etc.) are selected.
Thereby, the set value is suggested to the player by the aspect of the lamp effect. Therefore, the player's attention to the lamp effect can be improved, and the set value can be predicted by the player based on the aspect of the lamp effect.
As described above, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Modification 1)
As mentioned above, although embodiment of this invention was described, in the said embodiment, a various change is possible.
For example, in the above embodiment, a subcommand for specifying a setting value (hereinafter referred to as “setting value specifying command”) is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300. Then, in the effect control circuit 300, the set value specified by the set value specifying command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM, and various lamp effects (the lamp effect included in the “super reach variation effect 1”, “the slashing notice 5”). When selecting the aspect of the lamp effect included, the lamp effect included in the “big hit effect 6”, the lamp effect included in the demonstration effect, etc.), the mode corresponding to the set value stored in the predetermined area of the RAM is selected. Is done.
However, in the above embodiment, the setting value designation command may not be transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300.
For example, the main control circuit 200 selects a type corresponding to the set value as the stop symbol type (stop symbol number), and the effect control circuit 300 selects various lamp effects (lamps included in the “super reach variation effect 1”). When selecting an effect, a lamp effect included in the “slashing advance notice 5”, a lamp effect included in the “big hit effect 6”, etc., an aspect corresponding to the stop symbol number designated by the stop symbol designation command is selected. It does not matter as a configuration.
Specifically, the main control circuit 200 is configured such that the type of “big hit symbol” is selected according to the value of the big hit random number included in the determination start information.
Specifically, “big hit symbol group 1” to “big hit symbol group 6” are defined as groups of “big hit symbol” corresponding to the first special symbol lottery.
In addition, as “big hit symbols” belonging to each group corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (each of “big hit symbol group 1” to “big hit symbol group 6”), “one big hit symbol” (50 ways) and “big hit symbol” “2 symbols” (20 patterns), “3 jackpots” (5 patterns), “4 jackpots” (10 patterns), and “5 jackpots” (15 patterns) are defined.
In other words, 600 (100 ways × 6 groups = 600 ways) “hit symbols” are defined as “hit symbols” corresponding to the first special symbol lottery.
On the other hand, “big-hit symbol group 7” to “hit-hit symbol group 12” are defined as groups of “hit-hit symbols” corresponding to the second special symbol lottery.
In addition, as "big hit symbol" belonging to each group corresponding to the second special symbol lottery (each of "big hit symbol group 7" to "big hit symbol group 12"), "big hit symbol 6 symbols" (20 ways) and "big hit symbol" “7 symbols” (50 patterns), “8 jackpots” (15 patterns), “9 jackpots” (10 patterns), and “10 jackpots” (5 patterns) are defined.
In other words, 600 (100 ways × 6 groups = 600 ways) “hit symbols” are defined as “hit symbols” corresponding to the second special symbol lottery.
And about the total of 1200 ways (600 hits (“big hit symbol” corresponding to the first special symbol lottery)) + 600 ways (“big hit symbol” corresponding to the second special symbol lottery) = 1200 ways) Give a different stop symbol number. Thereby, based on the stop symbol number, it is possible to specify a group to which each “hit symbol” belongs (“hit symbol group 1” to “hit symbol group 12”).

In addition, “big hit symbol lottery table 1” to “big hit symbol lottery table 12” are stored (defined) as the big hit symbol lottery table.
Then, 100 “hit symbols” belonging to “hit symbol group 1” are registered in “hit symbol lottery table 1”. That is, when the “hit symbol lottery table 1” is selected, one “hit symbol” (stop symbol number) is selected from the 100 “hit symbols” belonging to the “hit symbol group 1”. .
On the other hand, 100 “hit symbols” belonging to “hit symbol group 2” are registered in the “hit symbol lottery table 2”. That is, when the “hit symbol lottery table 2” is selected, one “hit symbol” (stop symbol number) is selected from the 100 “hit symbols” belonging to the “hit symbol group 2”. .
On the other hand, 100 “hit symbols” belonging to “hit symbol group 3” are registered in the “hit symbol lottery table 3”. That is, when the “hit symbol lottery table 3” is selected, one “hit symbol” (stop symbol number) is selected from the 100 “hit symbols” belonging to the “hit symbol group 3”. .
On the other hand, 100 “hit symbols” belonging to “hit symbol group 4” are registered in the “hit symbol lottery table 4”. That is, when the “hit symbol lottery table 4” is selected, one “hit symbol” (stop symbol number) is selected from the 100 “hit symbols” belonging to the “hit symbol group 4”. .
On the other hand, 100 “hit symbols” belonging to “hit symbol group 5” are registered in the “hit symbol lottery table 5”. That is, when the “hit symbol lottery table 5” is selected, one “hit symbol” (stop symbol number) is selected from the 100 “hit symbols” belonging to the “hit symbol group 5”. .
On the other hand, 100 “hit symbols” belonging to “hit symbol group 6” are registered in the “hit symbol lottery table 6”. That is, when the “hit symbol lottery table 6” is selected, one “hit symbol” (stop symbol number) is selected from the 100 “hit symbols” belonging to the “hit symbol group 6”. .
On the other hand, 100 “hit symbols” belonging to “hit symbol group 7” are registered in the “hit symbol lottery table 7”. That is, when the “hit symbol lottery table 7” is selected, one “hit symbol” (stop symbol number) is selected from the 100 “hit symbols” belonging to the “hit symbol group 7”. .
On the other hand, 100 “hit symbols” belonging to “hit symbol group 8” are registered in the “hit symbol lottery table 8”. That is, when the “hit symbol lottery table 8” is selected, one “hit symbol” (stop symbol number) is selected from the 100 “hit symbols” belonging to the “hit symbol group 8”. .
On the other hand, 100 “hit symbols” belonging to “hit symbol group 9” are registered in the “hit symbol lottery table 9”. That is, when the “hit symbol lottery table 9” is selected, one “hit symbol” (stop symbol number) is selected from the 100 “hit symbols” belonging to the “hit symbol group 9”. .
On the other hand, 100 “hit symbols” belonging to “hit symbol group 10” are registered in the “hit symbol lottery table 10”. That is, when the “hit symbol lottery table 10” is selected, one “hit symbol” (stop symbol number) is selected from the 100 “hit symbols” belonging to the “hit symbol group 10”. .
On the other hand, 100 “hit symbols” belonging to “hit symbol group 11” are registered in the “hit symbol lottery table 11”. In other words, when the “hit symbol lottery table 11” is selected, one “hit symbol” (stop symbol number) is selected from the 100 “hit symbols” belonging to the “hit symbol group 11”. .
On the other hand, 100 “hit symbols” belonging to “hit symbol group 12” are registered in the “hit symbol lottery table 12”. That is, when the “hit symbol lottery table 12” is selected, one “hit symbol” (stop symbol number) is selected from the 100 “hit symbols” belonging to the “hit symbol group 12”. .

Here, during the occurrence of the “special figure low probability state”, the big hit random numbers “225” to “229” become the big hit values only when the set value = “6”.
Further, during the occurrence of the “special figure low probability state”, the big hit random numbers “220” to “224” become the big hit values only when the set value = “6” or “5”.
Further, during the occurrence of the “special figure low probability state”, the big hit random numbers “215” to “219” are the big hit values only when the set value = “6”, “5” or “4”. .
Further, during the occurrence of the “special figure low probability state”, for the big hit random numbers “210” to “214”, only when the set value = “6”, “5”, “4” or “3”, Big hit value.
Further, during the occurrence of the “special figure low probability state”, the set values = “6”, “5”, “4”, “3” or “2” for the big hit random numbers “205” to “209” Only if it is a big hit.
Further, during the occurrence of the “special figure low probability state”, the big hit random numbers “0” to “204” become the big hit values regardless of the set values.

On the other hand, during the occurrence of the “special figure high probability state”, the big hit random numbers “2240” to “2289” become the big hit values only when the set value = “6”.
Further, during the occurrence of the “special figure high probability state”, the big hit random numbers “2190” to “2239” become the big hit values only when the set value = “6” or “5”.
Further, during the occurrence of the “special figure high probability state”, the big hit random numbers “2140” to “2189” are the big hit values only when the set value = “6”, “5” or “4”. .
Further, during the occurrence of the “special figure high probability state”, for the big hit random numbers “2090” to “2139”, only when the set value = “6”, “5”, “4” or “3”, Big hit value.
Further, during the occurrence of the “special figure high probability state”, the set values = “6”, “5”, “4”, “3”, or “2” for the big hit random numbers “2040” to “2089” Only if it is a big hit.
Further, during the occurrence of the “special figure high probability state”, the big hit random numbers “0” to “2039” are the big hit values regardless of the set values.

Therefore, when the first special symbol lottery is executed (during the occurrence of the “special figure low probability state”) and the value of the big hit random number included in the determination start information is “225” to “229”, In the figure stop symbol determination, “big hit symbol lottery table 1” is selected as the big hit symbol lottery table. Thus, the “big hit symbol” belonging to “big hit symbol group 1” is selected when the set value = “6”.
On the other hand, when the first special symbol lottery is executed (during the occurrence of the “special figure low probability state”) and the value of the big hit random number included in the determination start information is “220” to “224”, In the figure stop symbol determination, “big hit symbol lottery table 2” is selected as the big hit symbol lottery table. Thus, the “big hit symbol” belonging to “big hit symbol group 2” is selected when the set value = “6” or “5”.
On the other hand, when the first special symbol lottery is executed (during the occurrence of the “special figure low probability state”) and the value of the big hit random number included in the determination start information is “215” to “219”, In the figure stop symbol determination, the “hit symbol lottery table 3” is selected as the jackpot symbol lottery table. As a result, the “big hit symbol” belonging to the “big hit symbol group 3” is selected when the set value = “6”, “5”, or “4”.
On the other hand, when the first special symbol lottery is executed (during the occurrence of the “special figure low probability state”) and the value of the big hit random number included in the determination start information is “210” to “214”, In the figure stop symbol determination, “big hit symbol lottery table 4” is selected as the big hit symbol lottery table. As a result, the “big hit symbol” belonging to “big hit symbol group 4” is selected when the set value = “6”, “5”, “4” or “3”.
On the other hand, when the first special symbol lottery is executed (during the occurrence of the “special figure low probability state”) and the value of the big hit random number included in the determination start information is “205” to “209”, In the figure stop symbol determination, the “big hit symbol lottery table 5” is selected as the big hit symbol lottery table. As a result, the “big hit symbol” belonging to the “big hit symbol group 5” is selected when the set value = “6”, “5”, “4”, “3” or “2”.
On the other hand, when the first special symbol lottery is executed (during the occurrence of “special figure low probability state”) and the value of the big hit random number included in the determination start information is “0” to “204”, In the figure stop symbol determination, the “big hit symbol lottery table 6” is selected as the big hit symbol lottery table. As a result, the “hit symbol” belonging to “hit symbol group 6” is selected regardless of the set value.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed (during the occurrence of the “special figure high probability state”) and the value of the big hit random number included in the determination start information is “2240” to “2289”, In the figure stop symbol determination, the “big hit symbol lottery table 7” is selected as the big hit symbol lottery table. Thus, the “big hit symbol” belonging to “big hit symbol group 7” is selected when the set value = “6”.
On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed (during the occurrence of a “high probability state of special figure”) and the value of the big hit random number included in the determination start information is “2190” to “2239”, In the figure stop symbol determination, the “big hit symbol lottery table 8” is selected as the big hit symbol lottery table. Thus, the “big hit symbol” belonging to “big hit symbol group 8” is selected when the set value = “6” or “5”.
On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed (the “high probability state of special figure” is occurring) and the value of the big hit random number included in the determination start information is “2140” to “2189”, In the figure stop symbol determination, “big hit symbol lottery table 9” is selected as the big hit symbol lottery table. As a result, the “big hit symbol” belonging to the “big hit symbol group 9” is selected when the set value = “6”, “5” or “4”.
On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed (during the occurrence of the “special figure high probability state”) and the value of the big hit random number included in the determination start information is “2090” to “2139”, In the figure stop symbol determination, the “big hit symbol lottery table 10” is selected as the big hit symbol lottery table. Thus, the “big hit symbol” belonging to the “big hit symbol group 10” is selected when the set value = “6”, “5”, “4” or “3”.
On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed (during the occurrence of the “high probability state of special figure”) and the value of the big hit random number included in the determination start information is “2040” to “2089”, In the figure stop symbol determination, the “big hit symbol lottery table 11” is selected as the big hit symbol lottery table. Accordingly, the “big hit symbol” belonging to the “big hit symbol group 11” is selected when the set value = “6”, “5”, “4”, “3” or “2”.
On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed (during the occurrence of the “high probability state of special figure”) and the value of the big hit random number included in the determination start information is “0” to “2039”, In the figure stop symbol determination, “big hit symbol lottery table 12” is selected as the big hit symbol lottery table. As a result, the “hit symbol” belonging to the “hit symbol group 12” is selected regardless of the set value.

Then, when “super reach variation 1” is selected as the type of variation pattern, and “hit symbol” (stop symbol number) belonging to “hit symbol group 1” is selected as stop symbol (stop symbol number), “Super reach variation effect 1F” is selected as the mode of the second variation effect.
On the other hand, when “super reach variation 1” is selected as the variation pattern type, and “hit symbol” (stop symbol number) belonging to “hit symbol group 2” is selected as stop symbol (stop symbol number), “Super reach variation effect 1E” is selected as the mode of the second variation effect.
On the other hand, when “super reach variation 1” is selected as the variation pattern type, and “big hit symbol” (stop symbol number) belonging to “big hit symbol group 3” is selected as the stop symbol (stop symbol number), “Super reach variation effect 1D” is selected as the mode of the second variation effect.
On the other hand, when “super reach variation 1” is selected as the variation pattern type, and “hit symbol” (stop symbol number) belonging to “hit symbol group 4” is selected as stop symbol (stop symbol number), “Super reach variation effect 1C” is selected as the second variation effect mode.
On the other hand, when “super reach variation 1” is selected as the type of variation pattern, and “hit symbol” (stop symbol number) belonging to “hit symbol group 5” is selected as stop symbol (stop symbol number), “Super reach variation effect 1B” is selected as the mode of the second variation effect.
On the other hand, when “super reach variation 1” is selected as the type of variation pattern, and “hit symbol” (stop symbol number) belonging to “hit symbol group 6” is selected as stop symbol (stop symbol number), “Super reach variation effect 1A” is selected as the mode of the second variation effect.

On the other hand, when the “slashing notice strength 5” is selected as the effect level of the slashing notice, and the “hit symbol” (stop symbol number) belonging to the “smashing symbol group 7” is selected as the stop symbol (stop symbol number). , “Sword-cutting advance notice 5F” is selected as the mode of cutting-off notice.
On the other hand, when the “slashing notice strength 5” is selected as the effect level of the slashing notice, and the “hit symbol” (stop symbol number) belonging to the “smashing symbol group 8” is selected as the stop symbol (stop symbol number). Then, the “slashing advance notice 5E” is selected as the aspect of the advance notice.
On the other hand, when the “slashing notice strength 5” is selected as the effect level of the slashing notice, and the “hit symbol” (stop symbol number) belonging to the “smashing symbol group 9” is selected as the stop symbol (stop symbol number). , “Sword-cutting notice 5D” is selected as the form of the sign-cutting notice.
On the other hand, when the “slashing notice strength 5” is selected as the effect level of the slashing notice, and the “hit symbol” (stop symbol number) belonging to the “smashing symbol group 10” is selected as the stop symbol (stop symbol number). Then, the “slashing advance notice 5C” is selected as the aspect of the advance notice.
On the other hand, when the “slashing notice strength 5” is selected as the effect level of the slashing notice, and the “hit symbol” (stop symbol number) belonging to the “smashing symbol group 11” is selected as the stop symbol (stop symbol number). Then, “辻 slash notice 5B” is selected as the form of the notice of slashing.
On the other hand, when the “slashing notice strength 5” is selected as the effect level of the slashing notice, and the “hit symbol” (stop symbol number) belonging to the “smashing symbol group 12” is selected as the stop symbol (stop symbol number). Then, the “slash cutting notice 5A” is selected as the mode of the cutting notice.

(Modification 2)
Moreover, in the said embodiment, it becomes the structure by which special figure winning determination is performed based on the jackpot value according to a setting value.
That is, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “204” are set as the big hit values when the set value = “1” and the special figure low probability state.
On the other hand, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “2039” are set as the big hit values when the set value = “1” and the special figure high probability state.
On the other hand, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “209” are set as the big hit values when the set value = “2” and the special figure low probability state.
On the other hand, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “2089” are set as the big hit values when the set value = “2” and the special figure high probability state.
On the other hand, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “214” are set as the big hit values when the set value = “3” and the special figure low probability state.
On the other hand, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “2139” are regarded as the big hit value when the set value = “3” and the special figure high probability state.
On the other hand, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “219” are set to the big hit value when the set value = “4” and the special figure low probability state.
On the other hand, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “2189” are set as the big hit values when the set value = “4” and the special figure high probability state.
On the other hand, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “224” are set as big hit values when the set value = “5” and the special figure low probability state.
On the other hand, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “2239” are set to the big hit value when the set value = “5” and the special figure high probability state.
On the other hand, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “229” are set as the big hit values when the set value = “6” and the special figure low probability state.
On the other hand, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “2289” are set as the big hit values when the set value = “6” and the special figure high probability state.
However, regardless of the set value, the special figure winning determination may be executed based on the common jackpot value. In the case of such a configuration, the range of the jackpot random number to be used is varied according to the set value. That is, the range of the jackpot value updated by the first and second loop counters is changed according to the set value.
For example, when the set value = “1” and the special figure low probability state, the range of the big hit random number to be used is “0” to “65535” (the values of the first and second loop counters (the big hit random number) are It is assumed that the configuration is updated within the range of “0” to “65535”), and among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “204” are the big hit values.
On the other hand, when the set value = “1” and the special figure high probability state, the range of the big hit random number to be used is “0” to “65535” (the values of the first and second loop counters (the big hit random number) are (0) to “65535”), and among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “2039” are assumed to be big hit values.
On the other hand, when the set value = “2” and the special figure low probability state, the range of the big hit random number to be used is “0” to “65530” (the values of the first and second loop counters (big hit random number) are It is assumed that it is updated within the range of “0” to “65530”), and among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65530”, “0” to “204” are the big hit values.
On the other hand, when the set value = “2” and the special figure high probability state, the range of the big hit random number to be used is “0” to “65485” (the values of the first and second loop counters (the big hit random number) are It is assumed that the configuration is updated within the range of “0” to “65485”), and among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65485”, “0” to “2039” are assumed to be big hit values.
On the other hand, when the set value = “3” and the special figure low probability state, the range of the big hit random number to be used is “0” to “65525” (the values of the first and second loop counters (the big hit random number) are It is assumed that it is updated within the range of “0” to “65525”), and among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65525”, “0” to “204” are the big hit values.
On the other hand, when the set value = “3” and the special figure high probability state, the range of the big hit random number to be used is “0” to “65435” (the values of the first and second loop counters (big hit random number) are It is assumed that it is updated within the range of “0” to “65335”), and among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65435”, “0” to “2039” are assumed to be big hit values.
On the other hand, when the set value = “4” and the special figure low probability state, the range of the big hit random number to be used is “0” to “65520” (the values of the first and second loop counters (the big hit random number) are It is assumed that it is updated within the range of “0” to “65520”), and among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65520”, “0” to “204” are the big hit values.
On the other hand, when the set value = “4” and the special figure high probability state, the range of the big hit random number to be used is “0” to “65385” (the values of the first and second loop counters (the big hit random number) are It is assumed that the configuration is updated within the range of “0” to “65385”, and among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65385”, “0” to “2039” are set as big hit values.
On the other hand, when the set value = “5” and the special figure low probability state, the range of the big hit random number to be used is “0” to “65515” (the values of the first and second loop counters (the big hit random number) are It is assumed that it is updated within the range of “0” to “65515”), and among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65515”, “0” to “204” are assumed to be big hit values.
On the other hand, when the set value = “5” and the special figure high probability state, the range of the big hit random number to be used is “0” to “65335” (the values of the first and second loop counters (the big hit random number) are It is assumed that it is updated within the range of “0” to “65335”), and among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65335”, “0” to “2039” are assumed to be big hit values.
On the other hand, when the set value = “6” and the special figure low probability state, the range of the big hit random number to be used is “0” to “65510” (the values of the first and second loop counters (the big hit random number) are It is assumed that it is updated within the range of “0” to “65510”), and among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65510”, “0” to “204” are the big hit values.
On the other hand, when the set value = “6” and the special figure high probability state, the range of the big hit random number to be used is “0” to “65285” (the values of the first and second loop counters (the big hit random number) are It is assumed that the configuration is updated within the range of “0” to “65285”), and among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65285”, “0” to “2039” are assumed to be big hit values.

(Modification 3)
Moreover, in the said embodiment, it is good also as a structure provided with the lamp | ramp for exclusive use for suggesting a setting value (henceforth a "setting value suggestion lamp").
The set value suggestion lamp includes one or a plurality of light emitting elements. And the production | presentation control circuit 300 performs a setting value suggestion lamp production according to generation | occurrence | production of a predetermined opportunity. In the set value suggestion lamp effect, the light emitting elements included in the set value suggestion lamp emit light.
In particular, the effect control circuit 300 selects a type corresponding to the set value as the type of the set value suggesting lamp effect (lamp effect number). Thus, in the set value suggestion lamp effect, the light emitting elements included in the set value suggestion lamp emit light in a mode corresponding to the set type.
For example, the set value suggestion lamp includes a light emitting element a to a light emitting element h. Then, in the lamp effect, the manner in which the light emitting element a to the light emitting element h emit light is varied according to the set value.
Specifically, in the lamp effect corresponding to the case where the set value = “1”, the light emitting elements a, c, e, and h are configured to emit light among the light emitting elements a to h. On the other hand, in the lamp effect corresponding to the case where the set value = “2”, the light emitting elements b, c, e, and f are configured to emit light among the light emitting elements a to h. On the other hand, in the lamp effect corresponding to the case where the set value = “3”, the light emitting elements a, e, f, h among the light emitting elements a to h are configured to emit light. On the other hand, in the lamp effect corresponding to the case where the set value = “4”, the light emitting elements a, c, f, and g are configured to emit light among the light emitting elements a to h. On the other hand, in the lamp effect corresponding to the case where the set value = “5”, the light emitting elements a, b, g, h are configured to emit light among the light emitting elements a to h. On the other hand, in the lamp production corresponding to the case where the set value = “6”, the light emitting elements b, c, f, and g are configured to emit light among the light emitting elements a to h.
Alternatively, the set value suggestion lamp includes one light emitting element a. In the lamp effect, the light emitting element a emits light. In particular, the timing at which the lamp effect is executed is varied according to the set value.
Specifically, when the set value = “1”, the lamp effect is executed according to the first timing (occurrence of the first trigger). On the other hand, when the set value = “2”, the lamp effect is executed according to the second timing (occurrence of the second opportunity). On the other hand, when the set value = “3”, the lamp effect is executed according to the third timing (occurrence of the third opportunity). On the other hand, when the set value = “4”, the lamp effect is executed according to the fourth timing (occurrence of the fourth trigger). On the other hand, when the set value = “5”, the lamp effect is executed according to the fifth timing (occurrence of the fifth trigger). On the other hand, when the set value = “6”, the lamp effect is executed in accordance with the sixth timing (occurrence of the sixth trigger).
Here, the first timing (first trigger) to the sixth timing (sixth trigger) are different timings (trigger).

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 11 Game board 20 Frame lamp 21 Board surface lamp 31 Main image display apparatus 31a Display screen 200 Main control circuit 300 Production control circuit

Claims (4)

A setting information setting means for setting one setting information among a plurality of setting information in accordance with an operation of the operation means;
A game determination means for executing a game determination according to the setting information set by the setting information setting means;
Game control means for executing a game according to the result of the game determination;
Light emitting means comprising one or more light emitting elements;
Production control means for executing a light emission effect by the light emission means,
The effect control means selects an aspect corresponding to the setting information set by the setting information setting means as an aspect of the light emission effect.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, comprising a plurality of modes in which a light emitting mode of a light emitting element included in the light emitting unit is different as a mode of light emitting effect.   In the plurality of aspects, a light emitting element that emits light at a predetermined timing, a number of light emitting elements that emit light at a predetermined timing, an emission color of the predetermined light emitting element, a light emission pattern of the light emitting element during a predetermined period, and a predetermined The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein at least one of timings at which the light emitting elements emit light is different. The game determination includes a winning determination and a winning type determination,
The game control means, when winning is determined by winning determination, causes a specific gaming state corresponding to the winning type determined by winning type determination, and the gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state is won. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the gaming state is set in accordance with the winning type determined by the type determination.

Images